1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2007-12-02.17} 7% 8% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 2007, 9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10% 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 11% 12% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 13% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 14% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 15% License, or (at your option) any later version. 16% 17% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 18% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 19% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 20% General Public License for more details. 21% 22% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 23% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 24% 25% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 26% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 27% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) 28% 29% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 30% reports; you can get the latest version from: 31% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or 32% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex 33% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). 34% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 35% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 36% 37% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 38% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 39% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 40% 41% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 42% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 43% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 44% tex foo.texi 45% texindex foo.?? 46% tex foo.texi 47% tex foo.texi 48% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 49% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 50% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 51% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 52% 53% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 54% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 55% full Texinfo distribution. 56% 57% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 58 59 60\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 61 62% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 63% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 64% they might have appeared in the input file name. 65\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 66 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 67 68 69\chardef\other=12 70 71% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 72% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 73\let\+ = \relax 74 75% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 76\let\ptexb=\b 77\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 78\let\ptexc=\c 79\let\ptexcomma=\, 80\let\ptexdot=\. 81\let\ptexdots=\dots 82\let\ptexend=\end 83\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 84\let\ptexexclam=\! 85\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 86\let\ptexgtr=> 87\let\ptexhat=^ 88\let\ptexi=\i 89\let\ptexindent=\indent 90\let\ptexinsert=\insert 91\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 92\let\ptexless=< 93\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 94\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 95\let\ptexplus=+ 96\let\ptexrbrace=\} 97\let\ptexslash=\/ 98\let\ptexstar=\* 99\let\ptext=\t 100 101% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 102% starts a new line in the output. 103\newlinechar = `^^J 104 105% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 106% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 107% 108\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 109 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 110\else 111 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 112\fi 113 114% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 115\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 116\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 117\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 118\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 119\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 120\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 121\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 122\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 123\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 124\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 125\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 126\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 127\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 128\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 129\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 130\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 131\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 132\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 133\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 134% 135\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 136\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 137\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 138\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 139\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 140\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 141\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 142\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 143\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 147% 148\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 149\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 150\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 151\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 152\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 153 154% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. 155\chardef\spacecat = 10 156\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} 157 158% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. 159\chardef\colonChar = `\: 160\chardef\commaChar = `\, 161\chardef\dashChar = `\- 162\chardef\dotChar = `\. 163\chardef\exclamChar= `\! 164\chardef\lquoteChar= `\` 165\chardef\questChar = `\? 166\chardef\rquoteChar= `\' 167\chardef\semiChar = `\; 168\chardef\underChar = `\_ 169 170% Ignore a token. 171% 172\def\gobble#1{} 173 174% The following is used inside several \edef's. 175\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 176 177% Hyphenation fixes. 178\hyphenation{ 179 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 180 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 181 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 182 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 183 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 184 spell-ing spell-ings 185 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 186 wide-spread wrap-around 187} 188 189% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 190\newdimen\bindingoffset 191\newdimen\normaloffset 192\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight 193 194% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 195% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 196% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 197% 198\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} 199 200% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should 201% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the 202% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would 203% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main 204% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). 205% 206\def\|{% 207 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. 208 \leavevmode 209 % 210 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. 211 \vadjust{% 212 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current 213 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. 214 \vskip-\baselineskip 215 % 216 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So 217 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. 218 \llap{% 219 % 220 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. 221 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt 222 % 223 % This is the space between the bar and the text. 224 \hskip 12pt 225 }% 226 }% 227} 228 229% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 230% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 231% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 232% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 233% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 234% 235\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 236\def\loggingall{% 237 \tracingstats2 238 \tracingpages1 239 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 240 \tracingparagraphs1 241 \tracingoutput1 242 \tracingmacros2 243 \tracingrestores1 244 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 245 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging 246 \tracingscantokens1 247 \tracingifs1 248 \tracinggroups1 249 \tracingnesting2 250 \tracingassigns1 251 \fi 252 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 253 \errorcontextlines16 254}% 255 256% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 257% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 258% 259\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 260 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 261\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 262 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 263\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 264 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 265 266% For @cropmarks command. 267% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 268% 269\newif\ifcropmarks 270\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 271% 272% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 273% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 274% 275\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 276\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 277\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 278\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 279 280% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 281% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 282% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 283% 284% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 285% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 286% 287% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 288% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 289% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is 290% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two 291% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and 292% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... 293\def\domark{% 294 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 295 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 296 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 297 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 298 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 299 \mark{% 300 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 301 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 302 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 303 }% 304} 305% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 306% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 307% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 308% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 309% first @chapter. 310\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 311 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 312 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 313} 314\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 315\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 316 317% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 318\def\lastchapterdefs{} 319\def\lastsectiondefs{} 320\def\prevchapterdefs{} 321\def\prevsectiondefs{} 322\def\lastcolordefs{} 323 324% Main output routine. 325\chardef\PAGE = 255 326\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 327 328\newbox\headlinebox 329\newbox\footlinebox 330 331% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents 332% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. 333\def\onepageout#1{% 334 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 335 % 336 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 337 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 338 % 339 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 340 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 341 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 342 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% 343 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 344 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% 345 % 346 {% 347 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 348 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 349 % before the \shipout runs. 350 % 351 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 352 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 353 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 354 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 355 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 356 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 357 % it needs to be 358 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} 359 \shipout\vbox{% 360 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 361 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 362 % 363 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 364 \hsize = \outerhsize 365 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 366 \vtop to0pt{% 367 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 368 \nointerlineskip 369 \line{% 370 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 371 \hfill 372 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 373 }% 374 \vss}% 375 \vskip\topandbottommargin 376 \line\bgroup 377 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 378 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 379 \vbox\bgroup 380 \fi 381 % 382 \unvbox\headlinebox 383 \pagebody{#1}% 384 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 385 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 386 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 387 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 388 \vskip 24pt 389 \unvbox\footlinebox 390 \fi 391 % 392 \ifcropmarks 393 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 394 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 395 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 396 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 397 \vbox to0pt{\vss 398 \line{% 399 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 400 \hfill 401 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 402 }% 403 \nointerlineskip 404 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 405 }% 406 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 407 \fi 408 }% end of \shipout\vbox 409 }% end of group with \indexdummies 410 \advancepageno 411 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 412} 413 414\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 415 416\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 417{\catcode`\@ =11 418\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 419% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 420\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 421 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 422\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 423\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 424\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 425} 426 427% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 428% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 429% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 430% 431\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 432\def\nstop{\vbox 433 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 434\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 435\def\nsbot{\vbox 436 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 437 438% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 439% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 440% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 441% 442\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 443\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 444 \def\argtorun{#2}% 445 \begingroup 446 \obeylines 447 \spaceisspace 448 #1% 449 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 450} 451 452{\obeylines % 453 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 454 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 455 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 456 }% 457} 458 459% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. 460\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 461\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 462 463% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 464% 465% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 466% @end itemize @c foo 467% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 468% by \finishparsearg. 469% 470\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 471\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 472\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 473 \def\temp{#3}% 474 \ifx\temp\empty 475 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 476 \let\temp\finishparsearg 477 \else 478 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 479 \fi 480 % Put the space token in: 481 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 482} 483 484% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 485% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 486% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 487% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 488% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 489% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 490% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 491% 492% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 493% 494\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 495 496% \parseargdef\foo{...} 497% is roughly equivalent to 498% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 499% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 500% 501% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my 502% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 503 504\def\parseargdef#1{% 505 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 506} 507\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 508 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 509 \def#1##1% 510} 511 512% Several utility definitions with active space: 513{ 514 \obeyspaces 515 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 516 517 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 518 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 519 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 520 % should produce a line of output anyway. 521 % 522 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 523 524 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 525 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 526 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 527 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 528} 529 530 531\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 532 533% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 534% 535% \envdef\foo{...} 536% \def\Efoo{...} 537% 538% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 539% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 540% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 541% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 542% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 543% 544% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 545% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The 546% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 547% special case.) 548 549 550% At runtime, environments start with this: 551\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 552% initialize 553\let\thisenv\empty 554 555% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 556\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 557\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 558 559% Check whether we're in the right environment: 560\def\checkenv#1{% 561 \def\temp{#1}% 562 \ifx\thisenv\temp 563 \else 564 \badenverr 565 \fi 566} 567 568% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected: 569\def\badenverr{% 570 \errhelp = \EMsimple 571 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 572 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 573} 574\def\inenvironment#1{% 575 \ifx#1\empty 576 out of any environment% 577 \else 578 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 579 \fi 580} 581 582% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 583% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 584% 585\parseargdef\end{% 586 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 587 \else 588 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 589 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 590 \csname E#1\endcsname 591 \endgroup 592 \fi 593} 594 595\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 596 597 598%% Simple single-character @ commands 599 600% @@ prints an @ 601% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). 602\def\@{{\tt\char64}} 603 604% This is turned off because it was never documented 605% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. 606%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' 607%% but suppressing ligatures. 608%\def\`{{`}} 609%\def\'{{'}} 610 611% Used to generate quoted braces. 612\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} 613\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} 614\let\{=\mylbrace 615\let\}=\myrbrace 616\begingroup 617 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, 618 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. 619 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other 620 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 621 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other 622 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% 623 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% 624 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% 625 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% 626!endgroup 627 628% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 629\let\comma = , 630 631% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 632% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 633\let\, = \c 634\let\dotaccent = \. 635\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 636\let\tieaccent = \t 637\let\ubaraccent = \b 638\let\udotaccent = \d 639 640% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 641% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 642\def\questiondown{?`} 643\def\exclamdown{!`} 644\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} 645\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} 646 647% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 648\def\imacro{i} 649\def\jmacro{j} 650\def\dotless#1{% 651 \def\temp{#1}% 652 \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi 653 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j 654 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 655 \fi\fi 656} 657 658% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 659% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 660% 661\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 662 663% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 664% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 665% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 666% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 667% \scriptscriptstyle). 668% 669\def\LaTeX{% 670 L\kern-.36em 671 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 672 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% 673 \kern-.15em 674 \TeX 675} 676 677% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 678% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 679% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 680% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 681% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 682{\catcode`@ = 11 683 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 684 % if the definition is written into an index file. 685 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 686 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 687} 688 689% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 690\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 691 692% @* forces a line break. 693\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 694 695% @/ allows a line break. 696\let\/=\allowbreak 697 698% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 699\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 700 701% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 702\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 703 704% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 705\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 706 707% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 708% 709\def\onword{on} 710\def\offword{off} 711% 712\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 713 \def\temp{#1}% 714 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 715 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 716 \else 717 \errhelp = \EMsimple 718 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% 719 \fi\fi 720} 721 722% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 723% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 724% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 725\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 726 727% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 728% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 729% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 730% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 731% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 732% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 733% the text is small, which looks bad. 734% 735% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 736% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 737% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 738% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 739% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 740% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 741% 742\newbox\groupbox 743\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 744% 745\envdef\group{% 746 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 747 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 748 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 749 \fi 750 \startsavinginserts 751 % 752 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 753 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 754 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 755 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 756 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 757 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 758 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 759 \comment 760} 761% 762% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 763% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 764% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 765% above. But it's pretty close. 766\def\Egroup{% 767 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 768 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 769 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 770 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 771 \egroup % End the \vtop. 772 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 773 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 774 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 775 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 776 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 777 % group, force a page break. 778 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 779 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight 780 \page 781 \fi 782 \fi 783 \box\groupbox 784 \prevdepth = \dimen1 785 \checkinserts 786} 787% 788% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 789% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 790% 791\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 792group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 793where each line of input produces a line of output.} 794 795% @need space-in-mils 796% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 797 798\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 799 800% Old definition--didn't work. 801%\parseargdef\need{\par % 802%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally 803%% if the depth of the box does not fit. 804%{\baselineskip=0pt% 805%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak 806%\prevdepth=-1000pt 807%}} 808 809\parseargdef\need{% 810 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 811 % paragraph. 812 \par 813 % 814 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 815 \dimen0 = #1\mil 816 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 817 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 818 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 819 % 820 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 821 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 822 % And a page break here is fine. 823 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 824 % 825 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 826 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 827 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 828 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 829 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 830 % 831 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 832 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 833 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 834 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 835 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 836 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 837 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 838 \penalty9999 839 % 840 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 841 \kern -#1\mil 842 % 843 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 844 \nobreak 845 \fi 846} 847 848% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 849 850\let\br = \par 851 852% @page forces the start of a new page. 853% 854\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 855 856% @exdent text.... 857% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 858 859% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 860% That's how much \exdent should take out. 861\newskip\exdentamount 862 863% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 864\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 865 866% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 867\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 868 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 869 870% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 871% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 872% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. 873% 874\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 875\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 876% 877\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 878 \nobreak 879 \kern-\strutdepth 880 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 881 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 882 \vss 883 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 884 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 885 \ifx#1l% 886 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 887 \else 888 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 889 \fi 890 \null 891 }% 892}} 893\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 894\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 895% 896% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 897% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 898% else use TEXT for both). 899% 900\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 901\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 902 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 903 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 904 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 905 \def\righttext{#2}% 906 \else 907 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 908 \def\righttext{#1}% 909 \fi 910 % 911 \ifodd\pageno 912 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 913 \else 914 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 915 \fi 916 \temp 917} 918 919% @include file insert text of that file as input. 920% 921\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 922\def\includezzz#1{% 923 \pushthisfilestack 924 \def\thisfile{#1}% 925 {% 926 \makevalueexpandable 927 \def\temp{\input #1 }% 928 \expandafter 929 }\temp 930 \popthisfilestack 931} 932\def\filenamecatcodes{% 933 \catcode`\\=\other 934 \catcode`~=\other 935 \catcode`^=\other 936 \catcode`_=\other 937 \catcode`|=\other 938 \catcode`<=\other 939 \catcode`>=\other 940 \catcode`+=\other 941 \catcode`-=\other 942} 943 944\def\pushthisfilestack{% 945 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 946} 947\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 948 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 949} 950\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 951 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 952} 953 954\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 955\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 956 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 957 958\def\thisfile{} 959 960% @center line 961% outputs that line, centered. 962% 963\parseargdef\center{% 964 \ifhmode 965 \let\next\centerH 966 \else 967 \let\next\centerV 968 \fi 969 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 970} 971\def\centerH#1{% 972 {% 973 \hfil\break 974 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 975 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 976 \line{#1}% 977 \break 978 }% 979} 980\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} 981 982% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 983 984\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 985 986% @comment ...line which is ignored... 987% @c is the same as @comment 988% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 989 990\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% 991\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 992\commentxxx} 993{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 994 995\let\c=\comment 996 997% @paragraphindent NCHARS 998% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 999% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 1000% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 1001% 1002\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 1003\def\noneword{none} 1004% 1005\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 1006 \def\temp{#1}% 1007 \ifx\temp\asisword 1008 \else 1009 \ifx\temp\noneword 1010 \defaultparindent = 0pt 1011 \else 1012 \defaultparindent = #1em 1013 \fi 1014 \fi 1015 \parindent = \defaultparindent 1016} 1017 1018% @exampleindent NCHARS 1019% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 1020% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 1021% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 1022\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 1023 \def\temp{#1}% 1024 \ifx\temp\asisword 1025 \else 1026 \ifx\temp\noneword 1027 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 1028 \else 1029 \lispnarrowing = #1em 1030 \fi 1031 \fi 1032} 1033 1034% @firstparagraphindent WORD 1035% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 1036% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 1037% paragraphs. 1038% 1039% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 1040% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 1041% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 1042% By default, we suppress indentation. 1043% 1044\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 1045\def\insertword{insert} 1046% 1047\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 1048 \def\temp{#1}% 1049 \ifx\temp\noneword 1050 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 1051 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 1052 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 1053 \else 1054 \errhelp = \EMsimple 1055 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 1056 \fi\fi 1057} 1058 1059% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1060% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1061% 1062% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1063% paragraph. 1064% 1065\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1066 \gdef\indent{% 1067 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1068 \indent 1069 }% 1070 \gdef\noindent{% 1071 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1072 \noindent 1073 }% 1074 \global\everypar = {% 1075 \kern -\parindent 1076 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1077 }% 1078} 1079 1080\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1081 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent 1082 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent 1083 \global \everypar = {}% 1084} 1085 1086 1087% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 1088% 1089\def\asis#1{#1} 1090 1091% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 1092% 1093% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 1094% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 1095% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 1096% which is what @var uses. 1097{ 1098 \catcode`\_ = \active 1099 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 1100 \catcode`\_=\active 1101 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 1102 } 1103} 1104% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. 1105% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but 1106% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not 1107% otherwise define @\. 1108% 1109% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 1110\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 1111% 1112\def\math{% 1113 \tex 1114 \mathunderscore 1115 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 1116 \mathactive 1117 $\finishmath 1118} 1119\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 1120 1121% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 1122% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 1123% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 1124% 1125{ 1126 \catcode`^ = \active 1127 \catcode`< = \active 1128 \catcode`> = \active 1129 \catcode`+ = \active 1130 \gdef\mathactive{% 1131 \let^ = \ptexhat 1132 \let< = \ptexless 1133 \let> = \ptexgtr 1134 \let+ = \ptexplus 1135 } 1136} 1137 1138% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. 1139\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} 1140\def\minus{$-$} 1141 1142% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 1143% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 1144% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 1145% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 1146% whichever is larger. 1147% 1148\def\dots{% 1149 \leavevmode 1150 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 1151 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 1152 \dimen0 = \wd0 1153 \else 1154 \dimen0 = 1.5em 1155 \fi 1156 \hbox to \dimen0{% 1157 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 1158 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 1159 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 1160 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 1161 }% 1162} 1163 1164% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 1165% 1166\def\enddots{% 1167 \dots 1168 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 1169} 1170 1171% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up 1172% Texinfo's parsing. 1173% 1174\let\comma = , 1175 1176% @refill is a no-op. 1177\let\refill=\relax 1178 1179% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 1180% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 1181% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). 1182% 1183\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 1184\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 1185 1186% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. 1187% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. 1188% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. 1189\def\setfilename{% 1190 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. 1191 \iflinks 1192 \tryauxfile 1193 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 1194 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 1195 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. 1196 \openindices 1197 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. 1198 % 1199 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 1200 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. 1201 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf 1202 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi 1203 \closein 1 1204 % 1205 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. 1206} 1207 1208% Called from \setfilename. 1209% 1210\def\openindices{% 1211 \newindex{cp}% 1212 \newcodeindex{fn}% 1213 \newcodeindex{vr}% 1214 \newcodeindex{tp}% 1215 \newcodeindex{ky}% 1216 \newcodeindex{pg}% 1217} 1218 1219% @bye. 1220\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1221 1222 1223\message{pdf,} 1224% adobe `portable' document format 1225\newcount\tempnum 1226\newcount\lnkcount 1227\newtoks\filename 1228\newcount\filenamelength 1229\newcount\pgn 1230\newtoks\toksA 1231\newtoks\toksB 1232\newtoks\toksC 1233\newtoks\toksD 1234\newbox\boxA 1235\newcount\countA 1236\newif\ifpdf 1237\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1238 1239% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1240% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, 1241% borrowed from ifpdf.sty. 1242\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined 1243\else 1244 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1245 \else 1246 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1247 \else 1248 \pdftrue 1249 \fi 1250 \fi 1251\fi 1252 1253% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1254% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1255% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1256% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1257% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html 1258% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX 1259% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1260% that's what we do). 1261 1262% double active backslashes. 1263% 1264{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active 1265 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% 1266 @catcode`@\=@active 1267 @let\=@doublebackslash} 1268} 1269 1270% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are 1271% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as 1272% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor 1273% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission 1274% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek. 1275% 1276% #1 is the tokens to replace. 1277% #2 is the replacement. 1278% #3 is the control sequence with the string. 1279% 1280\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% 1281 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% 1282 ##1% 1283 \ifx\\##2\\% 1284 \else 1285 #2% 1286 \HyReturnAfterFi{% 1287 \HyPsdReplace##2\END 1288 }% 1289 \fi 1290 }% 1291 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% 1292} 1293\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} 1294 1295% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. 1296\def\backslashparens#1{% 1297 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply 1298 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. 1299 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% 1300 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% 1301} 1302 1303\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1304with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1305be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1306output) for that.)} 1307 1308\ifpdf 1309 % 1310 % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex. 1311 \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35} 1312 \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1} 1313 % 1314 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k}} 1315 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1316 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1317 \def\setcolor#1{% 1318 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1319 \domark 1320 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1321 } 1322 % 1323 \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack} 1324 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1325 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1326 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1327 % 1328 \def\makefootline{% 1329 \baselineskip24pt 1330 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1331 } 1332 % 1333 \def\makeheadline{% 1334 \vbox to 0pt{% 1335 \vskip-22.5pt 1336 \line{% 1337 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1338 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1339 \getcolormarks 1340 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1341 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1342 }% 1343 \vss 1344 }% 1345 \nointerlineskip 1346 } 1347 % 1348 % 1349 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1350 % 1351 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1352 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1353 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1354 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1355 % 1356 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among 1357 % others). Let's try in that order. 1358 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1359 \begingroup 1360 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1361 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1362 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1363 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1364 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1365 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1366 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1367 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1368 \fi 1369 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1370 \fi 1371 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1372 \fi 1373 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1374 \fi 1375 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1376 \fi 1377 \closein 1 1378 \endgroup 1379 % 1380 % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1381 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1382 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1383 \immediate\pdfimage 1384 \else 1385 \immediate\pdfximage 1386 \fi 1387 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi 1388 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi 1389 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1390 #1.\pdfimgext 1391 \else 1392 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1393 \fi 1394 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1395 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1396 \fi} 1397 % 1398 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% 1399 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1400 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1401 \indexnofonts 1402 \turnoffactive 1403 \activebackslashdouble 1404 \makevalueexpandable 1405 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1406 \backslashparens\pdfdestname 1407 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1408 }} 1409 % 1410 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1411 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1412 % 1413 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as 1414 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. 1415 \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed} 1416 \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed} 1417 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1418 % 1419 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1420 % come from Petr Olsak 1421 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1422 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1423 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1424 \advance\tempnum by 1 1425 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1426 % 1427 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1428 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1429 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1430 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1431 % #4 is the page number 1432 % 1433 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1434 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1435 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1436 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1437 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1438 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1439 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty 1440 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% 1441 \else 1442 % Doubled backslashes in the name. 1443 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1444 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% 1445 \fi 1446 % 1447 % Also double the backslashes in the display string. 1448 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1449 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% 1450 % 1451 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1452 } 1453 % 1454 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1455 \begingroup 1456 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks 1457 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace 1458 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace 1459 % 1460 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1461 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1462 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1463 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1464 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1465 }% 1466 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1467 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1468 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1469 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1470 }% 1471 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1472 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1473 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1474 }% 1475 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1476 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1477 }% 1478 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1479 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1480 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1481 % 1482 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1483 % al. a second time, below. 1484 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1485 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1486 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1487 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1488 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1489 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1490 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1491 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1492 \readdatafile{toc}% 1493 % 1494 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1495 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1496 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1497 % 1498 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1499 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1500 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1501 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1502 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1503 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1504 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1505 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1506 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1507 % 1508 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1509 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1510 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1511 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1512 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1513 % 1514 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1515 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right 1516 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. 1517 \indexnofonts 1518 \setupdatafile 1519 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1520 \input \tocreadfilename 1521 \endgroup 1522 } 1523 % 1524 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1525 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1526 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1527 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1528 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1529 \fi 1530 \fi 1531 \nextsp} 1532 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} 1533 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1534 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1535 \else 1536 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1537 \fi 1538 % make a live url in pdf output. 1539 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1540 \begingroup 1541 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1542 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1543 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1544 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1545 % 1546 \normalturnoffactive 1547 \def\@{@}% 1548 \let\/=\empty 1549 \makevalueexpandable 1550 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1551 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1552 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1553 \endgroup} 1554 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1555 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1556 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1557 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1558 \def\maketoks{% 1559 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1560 \ifx\first0\adn0 1561 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1562 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1563 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1564 \else 1565 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1566 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1567 \let\next=\maketoks 1568 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1569 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1570 \fi 1571 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1572 \next} 1573 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1574 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1575 \def\pdflink#1{% 1576 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1577 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1578 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1579\else 1580 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1581 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1582 \let\endlink = \relax 1583 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1584 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1585 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1586\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1587 1588 1589\message{fonts,} 1590 1591% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 1592% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 1593% italics, not bold italics. 1594% 1595\def\setfontstyle#1{% 1596 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 1597 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font 1598} 1599 1600% Select #1 fonts with the current style. 1601% 1602\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} 1603 1604\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 1605\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 1606\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 1607\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 1608\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 1609 1610% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 1611% So we set up a \sf. 1612\newfam\sffam 1613\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 1614\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. 1615 1616% We don't need math for this font style. 1617\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 1618 1619 1620% Default leading. 1621\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt 1622 1623% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1624% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1625% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1626% 1627\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1628\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1629\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1630% 1631% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1632\def\baselinefactor{1} 1633% 1634\def\setleading#1{% 1635 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1636 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1637 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1638 \normalbaselines 1639 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1640 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1641 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1642 }% 1643} 1644 1645% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1646% 1647% do nothing with this by default. 1648\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1649\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1650\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1651 1652% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1653% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1654% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1655\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else 1656 \begingroup 1657 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1658 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1659%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1660%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1661%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1662%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1663%%Version: 1.000 1664%%EndComments 1665/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 166612 dict begin 1667begincmap 1668/CIDSystemInfo 1669<< /Registry (TeX) 1670/Ordering (OT1) 1671/Supplement 0 1672>> def 1673/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1674/CMapType 2 def 16751 begincodespacerange 1676<00> <7F> 1677endcodespacerange 16788 beginbfrange 1679<00> <01> <0393> 1680<09> <0A> <03A8> 1681<23> <26> <0023> 1682<28> <3B> <0028> 1683<3F> <5B> <003F> 1684<5D> <5E> <005D> 1685<61> <7A> <0061> 1686<7B> <7C> <2013> 1687endbfrange 168840 beginbfchar 1689<02> <0398> 1690<03> <039B> 1691<04> <039E> 1692<05> <03A0> 1693<06> <03A3> 1694<07> <03D2> 1695<08> <03A6> 1696<0B> <00660066> 1697<0C> <00660069> 1698<0D> <0066006C> 1699<0E> <006600660069> 1700<0F> <00660066006C> 1701<10> <0131> 1702<11> <0237> 1703<12> <0060> 1704<13> <00B4> 1705<14> <02C7> 1706<15> <02D8> 1707<16> <00AF> 1708<17> <02DA> 1709<18> <00B8> 1710<19> <00DF> 1711<1A> <00E6> 1712<1B> <0153> 1713<1C> <00F8> 1714<1D> <00C6> 1715<1E> <0152> 1716<1F> <00D8> 1717<21> <0021> 1718<22> <201D> 1719<27> <2019> 1720<3C> <00A1> 1721<3D> <003D> 1722<3E> <00BF> 1723<5C> <201C> 1724<5F> <02D9> 1725<60> <2018> 1726<7D> <02DD> 1727<7E> <007E> 1728<7F> <00A8> 1729endbfchar 1730endcmap 1731CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1732end 1733end 1734%%EndResource 1735%%EOF 1736 }\endgroup 1737 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1738 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1739 }% 1740% 1741% \cmapOT1IT 1742 \begingroup 1743 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1744 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1745%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1746%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1747%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1748%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1749%%Version: 1.000 1750%%EndComments 1751/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 175212 dict begin 1753begincmap 1754/CIDSystemInfo 1755<< /Registry (TeX) 1756/Ordering (OT1IT) 1757/Supplement 0 1758>> def 1759/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1760/CMapType 2 def 17611 begincodespacerange 1762<00> <7F> 1763endcodespacerange 17648 beginbfrange 1765<00> <01> <0393> 1766<09> <0A> <03A8> 1767<25> <26> <0025> 1768<28> <3B> <0028> 1769<3F> <5B> <003F> 1770<5D> <5E> <005D> 1771<61> <7A> <0061> 1772<7B> <7C> <2013> 1773endbfrange 177442 beginbfchar 1775<02> <0398> 1776<03> <039B> 1777<04> <039E> 1778<05> <03A0> 1779<06> <03A3> 1780<07> <03D2> 1781<08> <03A6> 1782<0B> <00660066> 1783<0C> <00660069> 1784<0D> <0066006C> 1785<0E> <006600660069> 1786<0F> <00660066006C> 1787<10> <0131> 1788<11> <0237> 1789<12> <0060> 1790<13> <00B4> 1791<14> <02C7> 1792<15> <02D8> 1793<16> <00AF> 1794<17> <02DA> 1795<18> <00B8> 1796<19> <00DF> 1797<1A> <00E6> 1798<1B> <0153> 1799<1C> <00F8> 1800<1D> <00C6> 1801<1E> <0152> 1802<1F> <00D8> 1803<21> <0021> 1804<22> <201D> 1805<23> <0023> 1806<24> <00A3> 1807<27> <2019> 1808<3C> <00A1> 1809<3D> <003D> 1810<3E> <00BF> 1811<5C> <201C> 1812<5F> <02D9> 1813<60> <2018> 1814<7D> <02DD> 1815<7E> <007E> 1816<7F> <00A8> 1817endbfchar 1818endcmap 1819CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1820end 1821end 1822%%EndResource 1823%%EOF 1824 }\endgroup 1825 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 1826 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1827 }% 1828% 1829% \cmapOT1TT 1830 \begingroup 1831 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1832 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1833%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1834%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1835%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 1836%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 1837%%Version: 1.000 1838%%EndComments 1839/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 184012 dict begin 1841begincmap 1842/CIDSystemInfo 1843<< /Registry (TeX) 1844/Ordering (OT1TT) 1845/Supplement 0 1846>> def 1847/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 1848/CMapType 2 def 18491 begincodespacerange 1850<00> <7F> 1851endcodespacerange 18525 beginbfrange 1853<00> <01> <0393> 1854<09> <0A> <03A8> 1855<21> <26> <0021> 1856<28> <5F> <0028> 1857<61> <7E> <0061> 1858endbfrange 185932 beginbfchar 1860<02> <0398> 1861<03> <039B> 1862<04> <039E> 1863<05> <03A0> 1864<06> <03A3> 1865<07> <03D2> 1866<08> <03A6> 1867<0B> <2191> 1868<0C> <2193> 1869<0D> <0027> 1870<0E> <00A1> 1871<0F> <00BF> 1872<10> <0131> 1873<11> <0237> 1874<12> <0060> 1875<13> <00B4> 1876<14> <02C7> 1877<15> <02D8> 1878<16> <00AF> 1879<17> <02DA> 1880<18> <00B8> 1881<19> <00DF> 1882<1A> <00E6> 1883<1B> <0153> 1884<1C> <00F8> 1885<1D> <00C6> 1886<1E> <0152> 1887<1F> <00D8> 1888<20> <2423> 1889<27> <2019> 1890<60> <2018> 1891<7F> <00A8> 1892endbfchar 1893endcmap 1894CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1895end 1896end 1897%%EndResource 1898%%EOF 1899 }\endgroup 1900 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 1901 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1902 }% 1903\fi\fi 1904 1905 1906% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the 1907% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). 1908% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 1909% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass 1910% empty to omit). 1911\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 1912 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 1913 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 1914} 1915% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 1916\let\cmap\gobble 1917% emacs-page end of cmaps 1918 1919% Use cm as the default font prefix. 1920% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 1921% before you read in texinfo.tex. 1922\ifx\fontprefix\undefined 1923\def\fontprefix{cm} 1924\fi 1925% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 1926\def\rmshape{r} 1927\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold 1928\def\bfshape{b} 1929\def\bxshape{bx} 1930\def\ttshape{tt} 1931\def\ttbshape{tt} 1932\def\ttslshape{sltt} 1933\def\itshape{ti} 1934\def\itbshape{bxti} 1935\def\slshape{sl} 1936\def\slbshape{bxsl} 1937\def\sfshape{ss} 1938\def\sfbshape{ss} 1939\def\scshape{csc} 1940\def\scbshape{csc} 1941 1942% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in 1943% Texinfo. 1944% 1945\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 1946% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 1947\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 1948\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 1949\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1950\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1951\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1952\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1953\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1954\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1955\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1956\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1957\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1958\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1959\def\textecsize{1095} 1960 1961% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1962\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1963\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1964\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1965\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1966 1967% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1968\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1969\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1970\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 1971\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1972\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 1973\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1974\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1975\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1976\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 1977\font\smalli=cmmi9 1978\font\smallsy=cmsy9 1979\def\smallecsize{0900} 1980 1981% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 1982\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 1983\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1984\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 1985\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1986\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 1987\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1988\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1989\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1990\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 1991\font\smalleri=cmmi8 1992\font\smallersy=cmsy8 1993\def\smallerecsize{0800} 1994 1995% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 1996\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 1997\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1998\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 1999\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2000\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2001\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2002\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2003\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2004\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2005\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2006\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2007\def\authorrm{\secrm} 2008\def\authortt{\sectt} 2009\def\titleecsize{2074} 2010 2011% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2012\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2013\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2014\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2015\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2016\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2017\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2018\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2019\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2020\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2021\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2022\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2023\def\chapecsize{1728} 2024 2025% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2026\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2027\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2028\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2029\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2030\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2031\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2032\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2033\let\secbf\secrm 2034\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2035\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2036\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2037\def\sececsize{1440} 2038 2039% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2040\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2041\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2042\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2043\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2044\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2045\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2046\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2047\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2048\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2049\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2050\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2051\def\ssececsize{1200} 2052 2053% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). 2054\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2055\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2056\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2057\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2058\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2059\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2060\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2061\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2062\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2063\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2064\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2065\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2066 2067% reset the current fonts 2068\textfonts 2069\rm 2070} % end of 11pt text font size definitions 2071 2072 2073% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2074% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2075% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2076% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2077% 2078\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2079% Text fonts (10pt). 2080\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2081\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2082\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2083\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2084\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2085\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2086\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2087\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2088\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2089\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2090\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2091\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2092\def\textecsize{1000} 2093 2094% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2095\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2096\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2097\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2098\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 2099 2100% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2101\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2102\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2103\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2104\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2105\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2106\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2107\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2108\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2109\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2110\font\smalli=cmmi9 2111\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2112\def\smallecsize{0900} 2113 2114% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2115\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2116\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2117\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2118\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2119\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2120\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2121\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2122\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2123\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2124\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2125\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2126\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2127 2128% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2129\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2130\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2131\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2132\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2133\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2134\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2135\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2136\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2137\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2138\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2139\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2140\def\authorrm{\secrm} 2141\def\authortt{\sectt} 2142\def\titleecsize{2074} 2143 2144% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2145\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2146\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2147\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2148\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2149\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2150\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2151\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2152\let\chapbf\chaprm 2153\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2154\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2155\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2156\def\chapecsize{1440} 2157 2158% Section fonts (12pt). 2159\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2160\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2161\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2162\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2163\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2164\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2165\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2166\let\secbf\secrm 2167\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2168\font\seci=cmmi12 2169\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2170\def\sececsize{1200} 2171 2172% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2173\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2174\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2175\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2176\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2177\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2178\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2179\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2180\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2181\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2182\font\sseci=cmmi10 2183\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2184\def\ssececsize{1000} 2185 2186% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). 2187\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2188\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2189\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2190\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2191\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2192\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2193\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2194\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2195\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2196\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2197\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2198\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2199 2200% reduce space between paragraphs 2201\divide\parskip by 2 2202 2203% reset the current fonts 2204\textfonts 2205\rm 2206} % end of 10pt text font size definitions 2207 2208 2209% We provide the user-level command 2210% @fonttextsize 10 2211% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2212% 2213\def\xword{10} 2214\def\xiword{11} 2215% 2216\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2217 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2218 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2219 % 2220 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2221 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2222 % 2223 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2224 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2225 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2226 \else 2227 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2228 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2229 \fi\fi 2230 \endgroup 2231} 2232 2233 2234% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2235% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since 2236% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except 2237% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and 2238% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). 2239% 2240\def\resetmathfonts{% 2241 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy 2242 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf 2243 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf 2244} 2245 2246% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead 2247% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the 2248% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire 2249% \tenSTYLE to set the current font. 2250% 2251% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2252% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in 2253% the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2254% 2255% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2256% 2257\def\textfonts{% 2258 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl 2259 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc 2260 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy 2261 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl 2262 \def\curfontsize{text}% 2263 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2264 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} 2265\def\titlefonts{% 2266 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl 2267 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc 2268 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy 2269 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl 2270 \def\curfontsize{title}% 2271 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% 2272 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} 2273\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2274\def\chapfonts{% 2275 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl 2276 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc 2277 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy 2278 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl 2279 \def\curfontsize{chap}% 2280 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% 2281 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} 2282\def\secfonts{% 2283 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl 2284 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc 2285 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy 2286 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl 2287 \def\curfontsize{sec}% 2288 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% 2289 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} 2290\def\subsecfonts{% 2291 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl 2292 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc 2293 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy 2294 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl 2295 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% 2296 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% 2297 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} 2298\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts 2299\def\reducedfonts{% 2300 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl 2301 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc 2302 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy 2303 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl 2304 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% 2305 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2306 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2307\def\smallfonts{% 2308 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl 2309 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc 2310 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy 2311 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl 2312 \def\curfontsize{small}% 2313 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2314 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2315\def\smallerfonts{% 2316 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl 2317 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc 2318 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy 2319 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl 2320 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% 2321 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2322 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} 2323 2324% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2325\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2326 2327% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2328% can fit this many characters: 2329% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2330% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2331% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2332% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2333% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2334% 2335% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2336% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2337% 2338% I wish the USA used A4 paper. 2339% --karl, 24jan03. 2340 2341 2342% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2343% 2344\definetextfontsizexi 2345 2346% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2347\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2348\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2349 2350% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2351\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2352 2353% Fonts for short table of contents. 2354\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2355\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2356\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2357\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2358 2359%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans 2360%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic 2361 2362% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction 2363% unless the following character is such as not to need one. 2364\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else 2365 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} 2366\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2367\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2368 2369% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. 2370% @var is set to this for defun arguments. 2371\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2372 2373% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2374% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2375\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2376 2377\let\i=\smartitalic 2378\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2379\let\var=\smartslanted 2380\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2381\let\emph=\smartitalic 2382 2383% @b, explicit bold. 2384\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2385\let\strong=\b 2386 2387% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2388\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2389 2390% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2391% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2392% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2393% 2394\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2395\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2396 2397% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2398% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2399% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2400% 2401\catcode`@=11 2402 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2403 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m 2404 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m 2405 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2406 } 2407 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2408 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2409 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2410 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2411 } 2412\catcode`@=\other 2413\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2414 2415\def\t#1{% 2416 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2417 \null 2418} 2419\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} 2420\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2421\font\keysy=cmsy9 2422\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 2423 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 2424 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 2425 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 2426 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 2427 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 2428\def\key #1{{\nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} 2429% The old definition, with no lozenge: 2430%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} 2431\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} 2432 2433% @file, @option are the same as @samp. 2434\let\file=\samp 2435\let\option=\samp 2436 2437% @code is a modification of @t, 2438% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. 2439\def\tclose#1{% 2440 {% 2441 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2442 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2443 % 2444 % Switch to typewriter. 2445 \tt 2446 % 2447 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2448 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2449 % 2450 % Turn off hyphenation. 2451 \nohyphenation 2452 % 2453 \rawbackslash 2454 \plainfrenchspacing 2455 #1% 2456 }% 2457 \null 2458} 2459 2460% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2461% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2462% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2463 2464% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2465% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2466% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2467% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. 2468% -- rms. 2469{ 2470 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2471 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2472 % 2473 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2474 \catcode\rquoteChar=\active \catcode\lquoteChar=\active 2475 \let'\codequoteright \let`\codequoteleft 2476 % 2477 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2478 \ifallowcodebreaks 2479 \let-\codedash 2480 \let_\codeunder 2481 \else 2482 \let-\realdash 2483 \let_\realunder 2484 \fi 2485 \codex 2486 } 2487} 2488 2489\def\realdash{-} 2490\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} 2491\def\codeunder{% 2492 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2493 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2494 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2495 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2496 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2497 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2498 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2499 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2500 {\_}% 2501} 2502\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2503 2504% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2505% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in 2506% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in 2507% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. 2508% 2509\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2510 2511\def\keywordtrue{true} 2512\def\keywordfalse{false} 2513 2514\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2515 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2516 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2517 \allowcodebreakstrue 2518 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2519 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2520 \else 2521 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2522 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% 2523 \fi\fi 2524} 2525 2526% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 2527% then @kbd has no effect. 2528 2529% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 2530% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 2531% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 2532\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 2533 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2534 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 2535 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 2536 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 2537 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2538 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 2539 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2540 \else 2541 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2542 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% 2543 \fi\fi\fi 2544} 2545\def\worddistinct{distinct} 2546\def\wordexample{example} 2547\def\wordcode{code} 2548 2549% Default is `distinct.' 2550\kbdinputstyle distinct 2551 2552\def\xkey{\key} 2553\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 2554\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 2555\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi 2556\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} 2557 2558% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. 2559\let\indicateurl=\code 2560\let\env=\code 2561\let\command=\code 2562 2563% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) 2564% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third 2565% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url 2566% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in 2567% a hypertex \special here. 2568% 2569\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} 2570\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup 2571 \unsepspaces 2572 \pdfurl{#1}% 2573 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2574 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2575 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2576 \else 2577 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2578 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2579 \ifpdf 2580 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it 2581 \else 2582 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url 2583 \fi 2584 \else 2585 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it 2586 \fi 2587 \fi 2588 \endlink 2589\endgroup} 2590 2591% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 2592% 2593\let\url=\uref 2594 2595% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 2596% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 2597% 2598%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 2599\ifpdf 2600 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 2601 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 2602 \unsepspaces 2603 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 2604 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2605 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 2606 \endlink 2607 \endgroup} 2608\else 2609 \let\email=\uref 2610\fi 2611 2612% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2613% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2614% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2615% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2616% 2617\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2618 2619% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 2620% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 2621% 2622\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 2623 2624\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} 2625 2626% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', 2627% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for 2628% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. 2629%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} 2630 2631% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2632\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2633\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2634\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2635 2636% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 2637% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 2638% all-uppercase. 2639% 2640\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 2641\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2642 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% 2643 \def\temp{#2}% 2644 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2645 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2646 \fi 2647} 2648 2649% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 2650% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 2651% 2652\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 2653\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2654 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2655 \def\temp{#2}% 2656 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2657 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2658 \fi 2659} 2660 2661% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 2662% 2663\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 2664 2665% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 2666% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 2667% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 2668% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 2669% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 2670% 2671% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 2672% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 2673% font height. 2674% 2675% feymr - regular 2676% feymo - slanted 2677% feybr - bold 2678% feybo - bold slanted 2679% 2680% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 2681% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 2682% Hmm. 2683% 2684% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 2685% Hope not. 2686% 2687% 2688\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 2689\def\eurofont{% 2690 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 2691 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 2692 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 2693 % font installed. 2694 % 2695 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 2696 % that to the current nominal size. 2697 % 2698 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 2699 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 2700 % 2701 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2702 % 2703 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2704 % bold: 2705 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 2706 \else 2707 % regular: 2708 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 2709 \fi 2710 \thiseurofont 2711} 2712 2713% Hacks for glyphs from the EC fonts similar to \euro. We don't 2714% use \let for the aliases, because sometimes we redefine the original 2715% macro, and the alias should reflect the redefinition. 2716\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 2717\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 2718\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 2719\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 2720\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 2721\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 2722\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 2723\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 2724% 2725\def\ecfont{% 2726 % We can't distinguish serif/sanserif and italic/slanted, but this 2727 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 2728 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 2729 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 2730 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 2731 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2732 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2733 % bold: 2734 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 2735 \else 2736 % regular: 2737 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 2738 \fi 2739 \thisecfont 2740} 2741 2742% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 2743% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 2744% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 2745% 2746\def\registeredsymbol{% 2747 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% 2748 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 2749 }$% 2750} 2751 2752% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 2753% 2754\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 2755 2756% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 2757% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 2758% so we'll define it if necessary. 2759% 2760\ifx\Orb\undefined 2761\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 2762\fi 2763 2764% Quotes. 2765\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 2766\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 2767\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 2768\chardef\quoteright=`\' 2769 2770 2771\message{page headings,} 2772 2773\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 2774\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 2775 2776% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 2777\newif\ifseenauthor 2778\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 2779 2780% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the 2781% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. 2782% 2783\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 2784 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 2785\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 2786 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 2787 2788\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 2789 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 2790 2791\envdef\titlepage{% 2792 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 2793 \begingroup 2794 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 2795 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 2796 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 2797 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 2798 \finishedtitlepagetrue 2799 % 2800 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 2801 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 2802 \let\oldpage = \page 2803 \def\page{% 2804 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 2805 \finishtitlepage 2806 \fi 2807 \let\page = \oldpage 2808 \page 2809 \null 2810 }% 2811} 2812 2813\def\Etitlepage{% 2814 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 2815 \finishtitlepage 2816 \fi 2817 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 2818 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 2819 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 2820 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 2821 \oldpage 2822 \endgroup 2823 % 2824 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 2825 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 2826 \HEADINGSon 2827 % 2828 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. 2829 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 2830 \shortcontents 2831 \contents 2832 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 2833 \global\let\contents = \relax 2834 \fi 2835 % 2836 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 2837 \contents 2838 \global\let\contents = \relax 2839 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 2840 \fi 2841} 2842 2843\def\finishtitlepage{% 2844 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 2845 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 2846 \finishedtitlepagetrue 2847} 2848 2849%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 2850 2851\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm 2852\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 2853 2854\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines 2855 \let\tt=\authortt} 2856 2857\parseargdef\title{% 2858 \checkenv\titlepage 2859 \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} 2860 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 2861 \finishedtitlepagefalse 2862 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 2863} 2864 2865\parseargdef\subtitle{% 2866 \checkenv\titlepage 2867 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 2868} 2869 2870% @author should come last, but may come many times. 2871% It can also be used inside @quotation. 2872% 2873\parseargdef\author{% 2874 \def\temp{\quotation}% 2875 \ifx\thisenv\temp 2876 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 2877 \else 2878 \checkenv\titlepage 2879 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 2880 {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% 2881 \fi 2882} 2883 2884 2885%%% Set up page headings and footings. 2886 2887\let\thispage=\folio 2888 2889\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 2890\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 2891\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 2892\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 2893 2894% Now make TeX use those variables 2895\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 2896 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 2897\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 2898 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 2899\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 2900 2901% Commands to set those variables. 2902% For example, this is what @headings on does 2903% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 2904% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 2905% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 2906% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 2907 2908 2909\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 2910\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2911\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2912\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2913 2914\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 2915\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2916\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2917\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2918 2919\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 2920 2921\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 2922\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2923\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2924\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2925 2926\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 2927\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2928\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2929 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 2930 % 2931 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 2932 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 2933 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt 2934 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 2935} 2936 2937\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 2938 2939% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 2940% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 2941% 2942% The same set of arguments for: 2943% 2944% @oddheadingmarks 2945% @evenfootingmarks 2946% @oddfootingmarks 2947% @everyheadingmarks 2948% @everyfootingmarks 2949 2950\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 2951\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 2952\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 2953\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 2954\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 2955 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 2956\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 2957 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 2958% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 2959\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 2960 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 2961 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 2962} 2963 2964\everyheadingmarks bottom 2965\everyfootingmarks bottom 2966 2967% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 2968% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 2969% @headings off turns them off. 2970% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 2971% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 2972% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 2973% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 2974% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 2975% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 2976 2977\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 2978 2979\def\HEADINGSoff{% 2980\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 2981\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} 2982\HEADINGSoff 2983% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 2984% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 2985% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 2986% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 2987% edge of all pages. 2988\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 2989\global\pageno=1 2990\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 2991\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 2992\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 2993\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 2994\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 2995} 2996\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 2997 2998% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 2999% page number on top right. 3000\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3001\global\pageno=1 3002\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3003\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3004\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3005\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3006\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3007} 3008\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3009 3010\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3011\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3012\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3013\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3014\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3015\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3016\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3017\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3018} 3019 3020\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3021\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3022\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3023\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3024\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3025\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3026\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3027} 3028 3029% Subroutines used in generating headings 3030% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3031% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3032% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3033\ifx\today\undefined 3034\def\today{% 3035 \number\day\space 3036 \ifcase\month 3037 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3038 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3039 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3040 \fi 3041 \space\number\year} 3042\fi 3043 3044% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3045% It generates no output of its own. 3046\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3047\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3048 3049 3050\message{tables,} 3051% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3052 3053% default indentation of table text 3054\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3055% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3056\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3057% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3058\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3059 3060% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3061\newdimen\itemmax 3062 3063% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3064% these defs. 3065% They also define \itemindex 3066% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3067 3068\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3069 3070\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3071 3072\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3073\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3074 3075\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3076 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3077 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3078 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3079 \itemindex{#1}% 3080 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3081 % 3082 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3083 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3084 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3085 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3086 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3087 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3088 % 3089 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3090 % but leave it ragged-right. 3091 \begingroup 3092 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3093 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3094 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil 3095 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3096 \endgroup 3097 % 3098 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 3099 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 3100 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 3101 % 3102 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 3103 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 3104 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 3105 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 3106 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 3107 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 3108 % 3109 \penalty 10001 3110 \endgroup 3111 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 3112 \else 3113 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 3114 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 3115 \noindent 3116 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 3117 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 3118 % eventually be printed. 3119 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 3120 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 3121 \unhbox0 3122 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 3123 \endgroup 3124 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 3125 \fi 3126} 3127 3128\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 3129\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 3130 3131% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 3132\envdef\table{% 3133 \let\itemindex\gobble 3134 \tablecheck{table}% 3135} 3136\envdef\ftable{% 3137 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 3138 \tablecheck{ftable}% 3139} 3140\envdef\vtable{% 3141 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 3142 \tablecheck{vtable}% 3143} 3144\def\tablecheck#1{% 3145 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 3146 \endgroup 3147 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 3148 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 3149 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 3150 \else 3151 \let\next\tablex 3152 \fi 3153 \next 3154} 3155\def\tablex#1{% 3156 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 3157 \parsearg\tabley 3158} 3159\def\tabley#1{% 3160 {% 3161 \makevalueexpandable 3162 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 3163 \expandafter 3164 }\temp \endtablez 3165} 3166\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 3167 \aboveenvbreak 3168 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 3169 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 3170 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 3171 \itemmax=\tableindent 3172 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 3173 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 3174 \exdentamount=\tableindent 3175 \parindent = 0pt 3176 \parskip = \smallskipamount 3177 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3178 \let\item = \internalBitem 3179 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 3180} 3181\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 3182\let\Eftable\Etable 3183\let\Evtable\Etable 3184\let\Eitemize\Etable 3185\let\Eenumerate\Etable 3186 3187% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 3188 3189\newcount \itemno 3190 3191\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 3192 3193\def\doitemize#1{% 3194 \aboveenvbreak 3195 \itemmax=\itemindent 3196 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 3197 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 3198 \exdentamount=\itemindent 3199 \parindent=0pt 3200 \parskip=\smallskipamount 3201 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3202 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 3203 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 3204 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 3205 \let\item=\itemizeitem 3206} 3207 3208% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 3209% 3210\def\itemizeitem{% 3211 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 3212 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 3213 {% 3214 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 3215 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 3216 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 3217 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 3218 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 3219 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 3220 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 3221 % that's the theory. 3222 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 3223 \noindent 3224 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 3225 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. 3226 \flushcr 3227} 3228 3229% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 3230% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 3231% 3232\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 3233 3234% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 3235% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 3236% argument is the same as `1'. 3237% 3238\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 3239\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 3240 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 3241 \def\thearg{#1}% 3242 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 3243 % 3244 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 3245 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 3246 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 3247 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 3248 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 3249 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 3250 \ifx\rest\empty 3251 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 3252 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 3253 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 3254 % not equal to itself. 3255 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 3256 % 3257 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 3258 % continuing to look for a <number>. 3259 % 3260 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 3261 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 3262 \else 3263 % It's a letter. 3264 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 3265 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 3266 \else 3267 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 3268 \fi 3269 \fi 3270 \else 3271 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 3272 \numericenumerate 3273 \fi 3274} 3275 3276% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 3277% given in \thearg. 3278% 3279\def\numericenumerate{% 3280 \itemno = \thearg 3281 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 3282} 3283 3284% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 3285\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 3286 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3287 \startenumeration{% 3288 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3289 \ifnum\itemno=0 3290 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3291 alphabet}% 3292 \fi 3293 \char\lccode\itemno 3294 }% 3295} 3296 3297% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 3298\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 3299 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3300 \startenumeration{% 3301 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3302 \ifnum\itemno=0 3303 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3304 alphabet} 3305 \fi 3306 \char\uccode\itemno 3307 }% 3308} 3309 3310% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 3311% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 3312% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 3313% 3314\def\startenumeration#1{% 3315 \advance\itemno by -1 3316 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 3317} 3318 3319% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 3320% to @enumerate. 3321% 3322\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 3323\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 3324\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3325\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3326 3327 3328% @multitable macros 3329% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 3330% 3331% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 3332% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 3333% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 3334% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 3335 3336% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 3337 3338% To make preamble: 3339% 3340% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 3341% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 3342% @item ... 3343% 3344% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 3345% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 3346% columns as desired. 3347 3348 3349% Or use a template: 3350% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3351% @item ... 3352% using the widest term desired in each column. 3353 3354% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 3355% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 3356% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 3357% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 3358 3359% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 3360% if they are. 3361 3362% Sample multitable: 3363 3364% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3365% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 3366% @item 3367% first col stuff 3368% @tab 3369% second col stuff 3370% @tab 3371% third col 3372% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 3373% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 3374% 3375% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 3376% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 3377% @end multitable 3378 3379% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 3380% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 3381% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 3382% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 3383% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 3384% to baseline. 3385% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 3386% 3387\newskip\multitableparskip 3388\newskip\multitableparindent 3389\newdimen\multitablecolspace 3390\newskip\multitablelinespace 3391\multitableparskip=0pt 3392\multitableparindent=6pt 3393\multitablecolspace=12pt 3394\multitablelinespace=0pt 3395 3396% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 3397% 3398\let\endsetuptable\relax 3399\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 3400\let\columnfractions\relax 3401\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 3402\newif\ifsetpercent 3403 3404% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 3405% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 3406% 3407\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 3408 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3409 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 3410 \setuptable 3411} 3412 3413\newcount\colcount 3414\def\setuptable#1{% 3415 \def\firstarg{#1}% 3416 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 3417 \let\go = \relax 3418 \else 3419 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 3420 \global\setpercenttrue 3421 \else 3422 \ifsetpercent 3423 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 3424 \else 3425 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3426 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 3427 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 3428 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 3429 \fi 3430 \fi 3431 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 3432 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 3433 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 3434 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 3435 \else 3436 \let\go = \setuptable 3437 \fi% 3438 \fi 3439 \go 3440} 3441 3442% multitable-only commands. 3443% 3444% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. 3445% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group 3446% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. 3447\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% 3448% 3449% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 3450% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 3451% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. 3452% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 3453\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 3454 3455% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 3456% 3457\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 3458% 3459\envdef\multitable{% 3460 \vskip\parskip 3461 \startsavinginserts 3462 % 3463 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 3464 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 3465 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 3466 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 3467 \def\item{\crcr}% 3468 % 3469 \tolerance=9500 3470 \hbadness=9500 3471 \setmultitablespacing 3472 \parskip=\multitableparskip 3473 \parindent=\multitableparindent 3474 \overfullrule=0pt 3475 \global\colcount=0 3476 % 3477 \everycr = {% 3478 \noalign{% 3479 \global\everytab={}% 3480 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 3481 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. 3482 \checkinserts 3483 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. 3484 %\filbreak 3485 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the 3486 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the 3487 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. 3488 }% 3489 }% 3490 % 3491 \parsearg\domultitable 3492} 3493\def\domultitable#1{% 3494 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 3495 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 3496 % 3497 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 3498 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 3499 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 3500 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 3501 \halign\bgroup &% 3502 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3503 \multistrut 3504 \vtop{% 3505 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 3506 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 3507 % 3508 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 3509 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 3510 % the first one. 3511 % 3512 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 3513 % to the width of each template entry. 3514 % 3515 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 3516 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 3517 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 3518 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 3519 % 3520 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 3521 \rightskip=0pt 3522 \ifnum\colcount=1 3523 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 3524 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 3525 \else 3526 \ifsetpercent \else 3527 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 3528 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 3529 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 3530 \fi 3531 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 3532 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 3533 \fi 3534 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 3535 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 3536 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 3537 % For example: 3538 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 3539 % @item @code{#} 3540 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 3541 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 3542 % marking characters. 3543 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 3544 }\cr 3545} 3546\def\Emultitable{% 3547 \crcr 3548 \egroup % end the \halign 3549 \global\setpercentfalse 3550} 3551 3552\def\setmultitablespacing{% 3553 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 3554 % 3555 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 3556 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 3557 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 3558 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 3559\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 3560\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 3561\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 3562\fi 3563%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 3564%% table. If not, do nothing. 3565%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 3566\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 3567\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 3568\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 3569 %% than skip between lines in the table. 3570\fi% 3571\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 3572\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 3573\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 3574 %% than skip between lines in the table. 3575\fi} 3576 3577 3578\message{conditionals,} 3579 3580% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 3581% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 3582% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 3583% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 3584% attempt to close an environment group. 3585% 3586\def\makecond#1{% 3587 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 3588 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 3589} 3590\makecond{iftex} 3591\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 3592\makecond{ifnothtml} 3593\makecond{ifnotinfo} 3594\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 3595\makecond{ifnotxml} 3596 3597% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 3598% 3599\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 3600\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 3601\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 3602\def\html{\doignore{html}} 3603\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 3604\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 3605\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 3606\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 3607\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 3608\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 3609\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 3610\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 3611\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 3612 3613% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 3614% 3615% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 3616\newcount\doignorecount 3617 3618\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 3619 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 3620 \obeylines 3621 \catcode`\@ = \other 3622 \catcode`\{ = \other 3623 \catcode`\} = \other 3624 % 3625 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 3626 \spaceisspace 3627 % 3628 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 3629 \doignorecount = 0 3630 % 3631 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 3632 \dodoignore{#1}% 3633} 3634 3635{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 3636 \obeylines % 3637 % 3638 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 3639 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 3640 % 3641 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 3642 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 3643 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 3644 % 3645 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 3646 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 3647 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 3648 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 3649 % 3650 % And now expand that command. 3651 \doignoretext ^^M% 3652 }% 3653} 3654 3655\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 3656 \def\temp{#1}% 3657 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 3658 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 3659 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 3660 \advance\doignorecount by 1 3661 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 3662 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 3663 \fi 3664 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 3665} 3666 3667% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 3668% 3669\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 3670 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 3671 \let\next\enddoignore 3672 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 3673 \advance\doignorecount by -1 3674 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 3675 \fi 3676 \next 3677} 3678 3679% Finish off ignored text. 3680{ \obeylines% 3681 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 3682 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 3683 % would result in a blank line in the output. 3684 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 3685} 3686 3687 3688% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 3689% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 3690% 3691% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 3692% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 3693% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 3694% didn't need it. 3695% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 3696% 3697\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 3698\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 3699 {% 3700 \makevalueexpandable 3701 \def\temp{#2}% 3702 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 3703 \ifx\temp\empty 3704 \next{}% 3705 \else 3706 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 3707 \fi 3708 }% 3709} 3710% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 3711\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 3712 3713% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 3714% 3715\parseargdef\clear{% 3716 {% 3717 \makevalueexpandable 3718 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 3719 }% 3720} 3721 3722% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 3723\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 3724\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 3725{ 3726 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active 3727 % 3728 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 3729 \let\value = \expandablevalue 3730 % We don't want these characters active, ... 3731 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 3732 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 3733 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 3734 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 3735 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore 3736 } 3737} 3738 3739% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 3740% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 3741% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 3742% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 3743% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 3744% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 3745% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 3746% 3747\def\expandablevalue#1{% 3748 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 3749 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 3750 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 3751 \else 3752 \csname SET#1\endcsname 3753 \fi 3754} 3755 3756% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 3757% with @set. 3758% 3759% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. 3760% 3761\makecond{ifset} 3762\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 3763\def\doifset#1#2{% 3764 {% 3765 \makevalueexpandable 3766 \let\next=\empty 3767 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 3768 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 3769 \fi 3770 \expandafter 3771 }\next 3772} 3773\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 3774 3775% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been 3776% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 3777% 3778% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 3779% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 3780% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 3781% 3782\makecond{ifclear} 3783\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 3784\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 3785 3786% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 3787% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 3788\let\dircategory=\comment 3789 3790% @defininfoenclose. 3791\let\definfoenclose=\comment 3792 3793 3794\message{indexing,} 3795% Index generation facilities 3796 3797% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 3798% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 3799\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 3800 3801% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. 3802% It automatically defines \fooindex such that 3803% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. 3804% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for 3805% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. 3806% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 3807% for the sake of vms. 3808% 3809\def\newindex#1{% 3810 \iflinks 3811 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 3812 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file 3813 \fi 3814 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 3815 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 3816} 3817 3818% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 3819% 3820\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 3821 3822% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 3823% 3824\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 3825% 3826\def\newcodeindex#1{% 3827 \iflinks 3828 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 3829 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 3830 \fi 3831 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 3832 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 3833} 3834 3835 3836% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 3837% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 3838% 3839% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 3840% inside @code. 3841% 3842\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 3843\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 3844 3845% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 3846% #3 the target index (bar). 3847\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 3848 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up 3849 % closing the target index. 3850 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined 3851 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the 3852 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. 3853 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname 3854 \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 3855 \fi 3856 % redefine \fooindfile: 3857 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 3858 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 3859 % redefine \fooindex: 3860 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 3861} 3862 3863% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. 3864% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 3865% and it is "foo", the name of the index. 3866 3867% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. 3868% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. 3869 3870% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 3871% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 3872 3873\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} 3874\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 3875 3876% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 3877\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} 3878\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 3879 3880% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 3881% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, 3882% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. 3883% 3884\def\indexdummies{% 3885 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 3886 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. 3887 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% 3888 % 3889 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. 3890 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes 3891 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. 3892 \let\{ = \mylbrace 3893 \let\} = \myrbrace 3894 % 3895 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is 3896 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts 3897 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, 3898 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput 3899 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput 3900 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that 3901 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it 3902 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that 3903 % is still getting written without apparent harm. 3904 % 3905 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to 3906 % help-texinfo, 22may06): 3907 % @macro funindex {WORD} 3908 % @findex xyz 3909 % @end macro 3910 % ... 3911 % @funindex commtest 3912 % 3913 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. 3914 % 3915 % Sample whatsit resulting: 3916 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} 3917 % 3918 % So: 3919 \let\endinput = \empty 3920 % 3921 % Do the redefinitions. 3922 \commondummies 3923} 3924 3925% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to 3926% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of 3927% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, 3928% this will be simpler. 3929% 3930\def\atdummies{% 3931 \def\@{@@}% 3932 \def\ {@ }% 3933 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd 3934 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd 3935 % 3936 % Do the redefinitions. 3937 \commondummies 3938 \otherbackslash 3939} 3940 3941% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. 3942% 3943\def\commondummies{% 3944 % 3945 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 3946 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, 3947 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 3948 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 3949 % from whatever follows. 3950 % 3951 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 3952 % space. 3953 % 3954 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 3955 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 3956 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 3957 % 3958 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% 3959 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% 3960 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 3961 % 3962 \commondummiesnofonts 3963 % 3964 \definedummyletter\_% 3965 % 3966 % Non-English letters. 3967 \definedummyword\AA 3968 \definedummyword\AE 3969 \definedummyword\L 3970 \definedummyword\OE 3971 \definedummyword\O 3972 \definedummyword\aa 3973 \definedummyword\ae 3974 \definedummyword\l 3975 \definedummyword\oe 3976 \definedummyword\o 3977 \definedummyword\ss 3978 \definedummyword\exclamdown 3979 \definedummyword\questiondown 3980 \definedummyword\ordf 3981 \definedummyword\ordm 3982 % 3983 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 3984 \definedummyword\bf 3985 \definedummyword\gtr 3986 \definedummyword\hat 3987 \definedummyword\less 3988 \definedummyword\sf 3989 \definedummyword\sl 3990 \definedummyword\tclose 3991 \definedummyword\tt 3992 % 3993 \definedummyword\LaTeX 3994 \definedummyword\TeX 3995 % 3996 % Assorted special characters. 3997 \definedummyword\bullet 3998 \definedummyword\comma 3999 \definedummyword\copyright 4000 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4001 \definedummyword\dots 4002 \definedummyword\enddots 4003 \definedummyword\equiv 4004 \definedummyword\error 4005 \definedummyword\euro 4006 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4007 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4008 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4009 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4010 \definedummyword\expansion 4011 \definedummyword\minus 4012 \definedummyword\pounds 4013 \definedummyword\point 4014 \definedummyword\print 4015 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4016 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4017 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4018 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4019 \definedummyword\quoteright 4020 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4021 \definedummyword\result 4022 \definedummyword\textdegree 4023 % 4024 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4025 \macrolist 4026 % 4027 \normalturnoffactive 4028 % 4029 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any 4030 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. 4031 \makevalueexpandable 4032} 4033 4034% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. 4035% 4036\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4037 % Control letters and accents. 4038 \definedummyletter\!% 4039 \definedummyaccent\"% 4040 \definedummyaccent\'% 4041 \definedummyletter\*% 4042 \definedummyaccent\,% 4043 \definedummyletter\.% 4044 \definedummyletter\/% 4045 \definedummyletter\:% 4046 \definedummyaccent\=% 4047 \definedummyletter\?% 4048 \definedummyaccent\^% 4049 \definedummyaccent\`% 4050 \definedummyaccent\~% 4051 \definedummyword\u 4052 \definedummyword\v 4053 \definedummyword\H 4054 \definedummyword\dotaccent 4055 \definedummyword\ringaccent 4056 \definedummyword\tieaccent 4057 \definedummyword\ubaraccent 4058 \definedummyword\udotaccent 4059 \definedummyword\dotless 4060 % 4061 % Texinfo font commands. 4062 \definedummyword\b 4063 \definedummyword\i 4064 \definedummyword\r 4065 \definedummyword\sc 4066 \definedummyword\t 4067 % 4068 % Commands that take arguments. 4069 \definedummyword\acronym 4070 \definedummyword\cite 4071 \definedummyword\code 4072 \definedummyword\command 4073 \definedummyword\dfn 4074 \definedummyword\emph 4075 \definedummyword\env 4076 \definedummyword\file 4077 \definedummyword\kbd 4078 \definedummyword\key 4079 \definedummyword\math 4080 \definedummyword\option 4081 \definedummyword\pxref 4082 \definedummyword\ref 4083 \definedummyword\samp 4084 \definedummyword\strong 4085 \definedummyword\tie 4086 \definedummyword\uref 4087 \definedummyword\url 4088 \definedummyword\var 4089 \definedummyword\verb 4090 \definedummyword\w 4091 \definedummyword\xref 4092} 4093 4094% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 4095% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 4096% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 4097% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 4098% 4099\def\indexnofonts{% 4100 % Accent commands should become @asis. 4101 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 4102 % We can just ignore other control letters. 4103 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 4104 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. 4105 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent 4106 % 4107 \commondummiesnofonts 4108 % 4109 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 4110 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 4111 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 4112 %\let\tt=\asis 4113 % 4114 \def\ { }% 4115 \def\@{@}% 4116 % how to handle braces? 4117 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 4118 % 4119 % Non-English letters. 4120 \def\AA{AA}% 4121 \def\AE{AE}% 4122 \def\L{L}% 4123 \def\OE{OE}% 4124 \def\O{O}% 4125 \def\aa{aa}% 4126 \def\ae{ae}% 4127 \def\l{l}% 4128 \def\oe{oe}% 4129 \def\o{o}% 4130 \def\ss{ss}% 4131 \def\exclamdown{!}% 4132 \def\questiondown{?}% 4133 \def\ordf{a}% 4134 \def\ordm{o}% 4135 % 4136 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 4137 \def\TeX{TeX}% 4138 % 4139 % Assorted special characters. 4140 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) 4141 \def\bullet{bullet}% 4142 \def\comma{,}% 4143 \def\copyright{copyright}% 4144 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% 4145 \def\dots{...}% 4146 \def\enddots{...}% 4147 \def\equiv{==}% 4148 \def\error{error}% 4149 \def\euro{euro}% 4150 \def\guillemetleft{<<}% 4151 \def\guillemetright{>>}% 4152 \def\guilsinglleft{<}% 4153 \def\guilsinglright{>}% 4154 \def\expansion{==>}% 4155 \def\minus{-}% 4156 \def\pounds{pounds}% 4157 \def\point{.}% 4158 \def\print{-|}% 4159 \def\quotedblbase{"}% 4160 \def\quotedblleft{"}% 4161 \def\quotedblright{"}% 4162 \def\quoteleft{`}% 4163 \def\quoteright{'}% 4164 \def\quotesinglbase{,}% 4165 \def\result{=>}% 4166 \def\textdegree{degrees}% 4167 % 4168 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 4169 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 4170 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 4171 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 4172 % that starts with \. 4173 % 4174 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 4175 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 4176 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 4177 % 4178 \macrolist 4179} 4180 4181\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. 4182\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 4183 4184% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 4185% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 4186\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 4187 4188% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. 4189% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 4190% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 4191% is with most defuns, which call us directly). 4192% 4193\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 4194 \iflinks 4195 {% 4196 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 4197 \toks0 = {#2}% 4198 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 4199 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 4200 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 4201 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 4202 \fi 4203 % 4204 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 4205 % 4206 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 4207 }% 4208 \fi 4209} 4210 4211% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: 4212% 4213\def\dosubindwrite{% 4214 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 4215 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 4216 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 4217 \fi 4218 % 4219 % Remember, we are within a group. 4220 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 4221 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now 4222 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. 4223 % 4224 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to 4225 % get the string to sort by. 4226 {\indexnofonts 4227 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion 4228 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% 4229 }% 4230 % 4231 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 4232 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 4233 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 4234 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 4235 % sorted result. 4236 \edef\temp{% 4237 \write\writeto{% 4238 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 4239 }% 4240 \temp 4241} 4242 4243% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 4244% 4245% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 4246% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 4247% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 4248% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 4249% sequences like this: 4250% @end defun 4251% @tindex whatever 4252% @defun ... 4253% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 4254% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 4255% the previous defun. 4256% 4257% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 4258% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 4259% 4260% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 4261% 4262% But wait, there is a catch there: 4263% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 4264% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 4265% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 4266% representation of the skip. 4267% 4268% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 4269% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 4270% 4271\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 4272% 4273\newskip\whatsitskip 4274\newcount\whatsitpenalty 4275% 4276% ..., ready, GO: 4277% 4278\def\safewhatsit#1{% 4279\ifhmode 4280 #1% 4281\else 4282 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 4283 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 4284 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 4285 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 4286 % 4287 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 4288 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 4289 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 4290 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 4291 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 4292 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4293 \else 4294 \vskip-\whatsitskip 4295 \fi 4296 % 4297 #1% 4298 % 4299 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4300 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 4301 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 4302 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 4303 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 4304 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 4305 % 4306 % @deffn deffn-whatever 4307 % @vindex index-whatever 4308 % Description. 4309 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 4310 % and the "Description." paragraph. 4311 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 4312 \else 4313 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 4314 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 4315 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 4316 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 4317 \fi 4318\fi 4319} 4320 4321% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 4322% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 4323% or 4324% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 4325% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 4326% containing these kinds of lines: 4327% \initial {c} 4328% before the first topic whose initial is c 4329% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 4330% for a topic that is used without subtopics 4331% \primary {topic} 4332% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 4333% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 4334% for each subtopic. 4335 4336% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 4337% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 4338 4339\def\findex {\fnindex} 4340\def\kindex {\kyindex} 4341\def\cindex {\cpindex} 4342\def\vindex {\vrindex} 4343\def\tindex {\tpindex} 4344\def\pindex {\pgindex} 4345 4346\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 4347{\obeylines % 4348\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 4349\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 4350 4351% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 4352 4353% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 4354% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 4355% 4356\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 4357 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 4358 % 4359 \smallfonts \rm 4360 \tolerance = 9500 4361 \plainfrenchspacing 4362 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 4363 % 4364 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 4365 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 4366 % \initial {@} 4367 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 4368 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 4369 \catcode`\@ = 11 4370 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s 4371 \ifeof 1 4372 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 4373 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 4374 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 4375 % there is some text. 4376 \putwordIndexNonexistent 4377 \else 4378 % 4379 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 4380 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 4381 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 4382 \read 1 to \temp 4383 \ifeof 1 4384 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 4385 \else 4386 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 4387 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 4388 % to make right now. 4389 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% 4390 \catcode`\\ = 0 4391 \escapechar = `\\ 4392 \begindoublecolumns 4393 \input \jobname.#1s 4394 \enddoublecolumns 4395 \fi 4396 \fi 4397 \closein 1 4398\endgroup} 4399 4400% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 4401% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 4402 4403\def\initial#1{{% 4404 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. 4405 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt 4406 % 4407 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 4408 \removelastskip 4409 % 4410 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 4411 \nobreak 4412 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip 4413 \penalty 0 4414 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip 4415 % 4416 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 4417 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 4418 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 4419 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 4420 % 4421 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 4422 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip 4423 \leftline{\secbf #1}% 4424 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 4425 \nobreak 4426 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 4427}} 4428 4429% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 4430% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 4431% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 4432% 4433% A straightforward implementation would start like this: 4434% \def\entry#1#2{... 4435% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to 4436% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- 4437% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. 4438% 4439% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. 4440% --kasal, 21nov03 4441\def\entry{% 4442 \begingroup 4443 % 4444 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 4445 % affect previous text. 4446 \par 4447 % 4448 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. 4449 \parfillskip = 0in 4450 % 4451 % No extra space above this paragraph. 4452 \parskip = 0in 4453 % 4454 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 4455 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 4456 % 4457 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number 4458 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the 4459 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large 4460 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across 4461 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. 4462 % 4463 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start 4464 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. 4465 \hangindent = 2em 4466 % 4467 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line 4468 % with blank space. 4469 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil 4470 % 4471 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing 4472 % columns. 4473 \vskip 0pt plus1pt 4474 % 4475 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 4476 \afterassignment\doentry 4477 \let\temp = 4478} 4479\def\doentry{% 4480 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 4481 \noindent 4482 \aftergroup\finishentry 4483 % And now comes the text of the entry. 4484} 4485\def\finishentry#1{% 4486 % #1 is the page number. 4487 % 4488 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if 4489 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be 4490 % cursed by a Unix daemon. 4491 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% 4492 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt 4493 \ % 4494 \else 4495 % 4496 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out 4497 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the 4498 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) 4499 \hfil\penalty50 4500 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 4501 % 4502 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as 4503 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull 4504 % \hbox ensues. 4505 \ifpdf 4506 \pdfgettoks#1.% 4507 \ \the\toksA 4508 \else 4509 \ #1% 4510 \fi 4511 \fi 4512 \par 4513 \endgroup 4514} 4515 4516% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 4517\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 4518 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} 4519 4520\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 4521 4522\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 4523\def\secondary#1#2{{% 4524 \parfillskip=0in 4525 \parskip=0in 4526 \hangindent=1in 4527 \hangafter=1 4528 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 4529 \ifpdf 4530 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 4531 \else 4532 #2 4533 \fi 4534 \par 4535}} 4536 4537% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 4538% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 4539% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 4540\catcode`\@=11 4541 4542\newbox\partialpage 4543\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 4544 4545\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 4546 % Grab any single-column material above us. 4547 \output = {% 4548 % 4549 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 4550 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 4551 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 4552 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 4553 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 4554 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 4555 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 4556 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 4557 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 4558 \fi 4559 % 4560 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 4561 % Unvbox the main output page. 4562 \unvbox\PAGE 4563 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 4564 }% 4565 }% 4566 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 4567 % 4568 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 4569 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 4570 % 4571 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 4572 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 4573 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 4574 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 4575 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 4576 % 4577 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 4578 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 4579 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 4580 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 4581 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 4582 % 4583 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 4584 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 4585 % been clobbered. 4586 % 4587 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 4588 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 4589 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 4590 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 4591 % 4592 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, 4593 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) 4594 \vsize = 2\vsize 4595} 4596 4597% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 4598% the last. 4599% 4600\def\doublecolumnout{% 4601 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 4602 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 4603 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 4604 % previous page. 4605 \dimen@ = \vsize 4606 \divide\dimen@ by 2 4607 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage 4608 % 4609 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 4610 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ 4611 \onepageout\pagesofar 4612 \unvbox255 4613 \penalty\outputpenalty 4614} 4615% 4616% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 4617% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 4618\def\pagesofar{% 4619 \unvbox\partialpage 4620 % 4621 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 4622 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 4623 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 4624} 4625% 4626% All done with double columns. 4627\def\enddoublecolumns{% 4628 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 4629 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 4630 % following situation: 4631 % 4632 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 4633 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 4634 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 4635 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 4636 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 4637 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 4638 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 4639 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 4640 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 4641 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 4642 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 4643 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 4644 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 4645 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 4646 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 4647 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 4648 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 4649 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see 4650 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 4651 % 4652 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 4653 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 4654 \penalty0 4655 % 4656 \output = {% 4657 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the 4658 % current page, no automatic page break. 4659 \balancecolumns 4660 % 4661 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, 4662 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output 4663 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 4664 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 4665 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be 4666 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes 4667 % the output somewhat more palatable.) 4668 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 4669 }% 4670 \eject 4671 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 4672 % 4673 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 4674 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 4675 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the 4676 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). 4677 \pagegoal = \vsize 4678} 4679% 4680% Called at the end of the double column material. 4681\def\balancecolumns{% 4682 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 4683 \dimen@ = \ht0 4684 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 4685 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 4686 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 4687 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% 4688 \splittopskip = \topskip 4689 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. 4690 {% 4691 \vbadness = 10000 4692 \loop 4693 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 4694 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 4695 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ 4696 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 4697 \repeat 4698 }% 4699 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% 4700 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% 4701 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% 4702 % 4703 \pagesofar 4704} 4705\catcode`\@ = \other 4706 4707 4708\message{sectioning,} 4709% Chapters, sections, etc. 4710 4711% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered 4712% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 4713% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 4714% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 4715% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 4716\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 4717\newcount\chapno 4718\newcount\secno \secno=0 4719\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 4720\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 4721 4722% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 4723\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 4724% 4725% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 4726% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 4727% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 4728% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 4729% 4730\def\appendixletter{% 4731 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 4732 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 4733 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 4734 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 4735 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 4736 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 4737 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 4738 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 4739 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 4740 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 4741 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 4742 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 4743 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 4744 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 4745 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 4746 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 4747 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 4748 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 4749 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 4750 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 4751 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 4752 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 4753 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 4754 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 4755 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 4756 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 4757 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 4758 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 4759 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 4760 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 4761 \else\char\the\appendixno 4762 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 4763 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 4764 4765% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 4766% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 4767% these. @section does likewise. 4768\def\thischapter{} 4769\def\thischapternum{} 4770\def\thischaptername{} 4771\def\thissection{} 4772\def\thissectionnum{} 4773\def\thissectionname{} 4774 4775\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 4776\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 4777 4778% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 4779\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 4780\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 4781 4782% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 4783\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 4784\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 4785 4786% we only have subsub. 4787\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 4788% 4789% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 4790% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 4791\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel 4792% 4793% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 4794% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 4795\def\chapheadtype{N} 4796 4797% Choose a heading macro 4798% #1 is heading type 4799% #2 is heading level 4800% #3 is text for heading 4801\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 4802 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 4803 \absseclevel=#2 4804 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 4805 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 4806 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 4807 \absseclevel = 0 4808 \else 4809 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 4810 \absseclevel = 3 4811 \fi 4812 \fi 4813 % The heading type: 4814 \def\headtype{#1}% 4815 \if \headtype U% 4816 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel 4817 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel 4818 \fi 4819 \else 4820 % Check for appendix sections: 4821 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 4822 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 4823 \else 4824 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 4825 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 4826 \fi\fi 4827 \fi 4828 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 4829 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel 4830 \def\headtype{U}% 4831 \else 4832 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 4833 \fi 4834 \fi 4835 % Now print the heading: 4836 \if \headtype U% 4837 \ifcase\absseclevel 4838 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 4839 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 4840 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 4841 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4842 \fi 4843 \else 4844 \if \headtype A% 4845 \ifcase\absseclevel 4846 \appendixzzz{#3}% 4847 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 4848 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 4849 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4850 \fi 4851 \else 4852 \ifcase\absseclevel 4853 \chapterzzz{#3}% 4854 \or \seczzz{#3}% 4855 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 4856 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4857 \fi 4858 \fi 4859 \fi 4860 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 4861} 4862 4863% an interface: 4864\def\numhead{\genhead N} 4865\def\apphead{\genhead A} 4866\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 4867 4868% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 4869% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 4870% 4871% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 4872% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 4873\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 4874% 4875\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 4876\def\chapterzzz#1{% 4877 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 4878 % as an @include file. 4879 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4880 \global\advance\chapno by 1 4881 % 4882 % Used for \float. 4883 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 4884 \resetallfloatnos 4885 % 4886 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% 4887 % 4888 % Write the actual heading. 4889 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 4890 % 4891 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 4892 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 4893 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 4894 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 4895} 4896 4897\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz 4898\def\appendixzzz#1{% 4899 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4900 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 4901 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 4902 \resetallfloatnos 4903 % 4904 \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% 4905 \message{\appendixnum}% 4906 % 4907 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 4908 % 4909 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 4910 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 4911 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 4912} 4913 4914\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz 4915\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 4916 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4917 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 4918 % 4919 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 4920 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 4921 \resetallfloatnos 4922 % 4923 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 4924 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 4925 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 4926 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 4927 % to be executed, not expanded). 4928 % 4929 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 4930 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 4931 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 4932 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 4933 % the toc entries.) 4934 \toks0 = {#1}% 4935 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 4936 % 4937 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 4938 % 4939 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 4940 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 4941 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 4942} 4943 4944% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 4945\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 4946 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break 4947 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. 4948 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 4949 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 4950 \unnmhead0{#1}% 4951 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 4952} 4953 4954% @top is like @unnumbered. 4955\let\top\unnumbered 4956 4957% Sections. 4958\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 4959\def\seczzz#1{% 4960 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4961 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 4962} 4963 4964\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz 4965\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 4966 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4967 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 4968} 4969\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 4970 4971\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz 4972\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 4973 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4974 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 4975} 4976 4977% Subsections. 4978\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz 4979\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 4980 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4981 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 4982} 4983 4984\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz 4985\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 4986 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4987 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 4988 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 4989} 4990 4991\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz 4992\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 4993 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4994 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 4995 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 4996} 4997 4998% Subsubsections. 4999\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz 5000\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5001 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5002 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 5003 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5004} 5005 5006\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz 5007\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 5008 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5009 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 5010 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5011} 5012 5013\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz 5014\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5015 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5016 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 5017 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5018} 5019 5020% These macros control what the section commands do, according 5021% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 5022% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 5023\let\section = \numberedsec 5024\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5025\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5026 5027% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 5028 5029% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: 5030% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit 5031% overlong headings to fold. 5032% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a 5033% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. 5034% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and 5035% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. 5036 5037 5038\def\majorheading{% 5039 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 5040 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 5041} 5042 5043\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 5044\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 5045 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5046 \parindent=0pt\raggedright 5047 \rm #1\hfill}}% 5048 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax 5049 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5050} 5051 5052% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 5053\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5054 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5055\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5056 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5057\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5058 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5059 5060% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 5061% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 5062% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 5063 5064%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 5065\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 5066 5067%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it 5068% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 5069 5070\newskip\chapheadingskip 5071 5072\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 5073\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 5074% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 5075% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 5076% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 5077\def\chapoddpage{% 5078 \chappager 5079 \ifodd\pageno \else 5080 \begingroup 5081 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 5082 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 5083 \hbox to 0pt{}% 5084 \chappager 5085 \endgroup 5086 \fi 5087} 5088 5089\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 5090 5091\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 5092\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5093\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 5094\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 5095 5096\def\CHAPPAGon{% 5097\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5098\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 5099\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 5100\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 5101 5102\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 5103\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 5104\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 5105\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 5106\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 5107 5108\CHAPPAGon 5109 5110% Chapter opening. 5111% 5112% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 5113% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 5114% 5115% To test against our argument. 5116\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 5117\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 5118\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 5119% 5120\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 5121 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5122 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5123 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5124 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5125 \gdef\thissection{}}% 5126 % 5127 \def\temptype{#2}% 5128 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5129 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5130 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 5131 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5132 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5133 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 5134 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5135 \toks0={#1}% 5136 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5137 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5138 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 5139 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum: 5140 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5141 }% 5142 \else 5143 \toks0={#1}% 5144 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5145 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5146 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 5147 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum: 5148 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5149 }% 5150 \fi\fi\fi 5151 % 5152 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5153 % the preceding space. 5154 \safewhatsit\domark 5155 % 5156 % Insert the chapter heading break. 5157 \pchapsepmacro 5158 % 5159 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5160 % between here and the heading. 5161 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5162 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5163 \domark 5164 % 5165 {% 5166 \chapfonts \rm 5167 % 5168 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 5169 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 5170 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 5171 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5172 % 5173 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 5174 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 5175 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5176 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5177 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 5178 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5179 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 5180 \def\toctype{omit}% 5181 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5182 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 5183 \def\toctype{app}% 5184 \else 5185 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 5186 \def\toctype{numchap}% 5187 \fi\fi\fi 5188 % 5189 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 5190 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 5191 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 5192 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 5193 % 5194 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 5195 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 5196 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 5197 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 5198 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 5199 \donoderef{#2}% 5200 % 5201 % Typeset the actual heading. 5202 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 5203 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright 5204 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 5205 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 5206 }% 5207 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 5208 \nobreak 5209} 5210 5211% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 5212\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5213\def\centerparameters{% 5214 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 5215 \leftskip = \rightskip 5216 \parfillskip = 0pt 5217} 5218 5219 5220% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not 5221% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. 5222% 5223\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} 5224% 5225\def\unnchfopen #1{% 5226\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5227 \parindent=0pt\raggedright 5228 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 5229} 5230\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts 5231\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% 5232\par\penalty 5000 % 5233} 5234\def\centerchfopen #1{% 5235\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5236 \parindent=0pt 5237 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 5238} 5239\def\CHAPFopen{% 5240 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen 5241 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} 5242 5243 5244% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 5245% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 5246% 5247\newskip\secheadingskip 5248\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 5249 5250% Subsection titles. 5251\newskip\subsecheadingskip 5252\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 5253 5254% Subsubsection titles. 5255\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 5256\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 5257 5258 5259% Print any size, any type, section title. 5260% 5261% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is 5262% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the 5263% section number. 5264% 5265\def\seckeyword{sec} 5266% 5267\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 5268 {% 5269 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 5270 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 5271 % 5272 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 5273 \def\temptype{#3}% 5274 % 5275 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5276 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5277 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5278 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5279 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5280 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 5281 \fi 5282 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5283 % Don't redefine \thissection. 5284 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5285 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5286 \toks0={#1}% 5287 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5288 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5289 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5290 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5291 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5292 }% 5293 \fi 5294 \else 5295 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5296 \toks0={#1}% 5297 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5298 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5299 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5300 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5301 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5302 }% 5303 \fi 5304 \fi\fi\fi 5305 % 5306 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5307 % the preceding space. 5308 \safewhatsit\domark 5309 % 5310 % Insert space above the heading. 5311 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 5312 % 5313 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5314 % between here and the heading. 5315 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5316 \domark 5317 % 5318 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 5319 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5320 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5321 \def\toctype{unn}% 5322 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5323 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5324 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 5325 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 5326 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5327 \def\toctype{omit}% 5328 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 5329 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5330 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5331 \def\toctype{app}% 5332 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5333 \else 5334 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5335 \def\toctype{num}% 5336 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5337 \fi\fi\fi 5338 % 5339 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 5340 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 5341 % 5342 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 5343 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 5344 \donoderef{#3}% 5345 % 5346 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 5347 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 5348 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 5349 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 5350 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 5351 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 5352 \nobreak 5353 % 5354 % Output the actual section heading. 5355 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright 5356 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 5357 \unhbox0 #1}% 5358 }% 5359 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 5360 % Don't allow stretch, though. 5361 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 5362 % 5363 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 5364 % was followed by glue. 5365 \nobreak 5366 % 5367 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 5368 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 5369 % discardable item.) 5370 \vskip-\parskip 5371 % 5372 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > 5373 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after 5374 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: 5375 % 5376 % @section sec-whatever 5377 % @deffn def-whatever 5378 \penalty 10001 5379} 5380 5381 5382\message{toc,} 5383% Table of contents. 5384\newwrite\tocfile 5385 5386% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 5387% Called from @chapter, etc. 5388% 5389% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 5390% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 5391% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 5392% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 5393% destination to jump to. 5394% 5395% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 5396% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 5397% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 5398% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 5399% 5400\newif\iftocfileopened 5401\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 5402% 5403\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 5404 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 5405 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 5406 \iftocfileopened\else 5407 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 5408 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 5409 \fi 5410 % 5411 \iflinks 5412 {\atdummies 5413 \edef\temp{% 5414 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 5415 \temp 5416 }% 5417 \fi 5418 \fi 5419 % 5420 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 5421 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 5422 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 5423 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 5424 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 5425 % `1', and two named `2'. 5426 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi 5427} 5428 5429 5430% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 5431% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 5432% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 5433% 5434\def\activecatcodes{% 5435 \catcode`\"=\active 5436 \catcode`\$=\active 5437 \catcode`\<=\active 5438 \catcode`\>=\active 5439 \catcode`\\=\active 5440 \catcode`\^=\active 5441 \catcode`\_=\active 5442 \catcode`\|=\active 5443 \catcode`\~=\active 5444} 5445 5446 5447% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 5448\def\readtocfile{% 5449 \setupdatafile 5450 \activecatcodes 5451 \input \tocreadfilename 5452} 5453 5454\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 5455\newcount\savepageno 5456\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 5457 5458% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 5459% 5460\def\startcontents#1{% 5461 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 5462 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 5463 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 5464 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 5465 \contentsalignmacro 5466 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 5467 % 5468 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 5469 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 5470 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 5471 % 5472 \savepageno = \pageno 5473 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 5474 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 5475 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 5476 % 5477 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 5478 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 5479} 5480 5481% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 5482% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 5483% 5484\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 5485 5486% Normal (long) toc. 5487% 5488\def\contents{% 5489 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 5490 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 5491 \ifeof 1 \else 5492 \readtocfile 5493 \fi 5494 \vfill \eject 5495 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 5496 \ifeof 1 \else 5497 \pdfmakeoutlines 5498 \fi 5499 \closein 1 5500 \endgroup 5501 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 5502 \global\pageno = \savepageno 5503} 5504 5505% And just the chapters. 5506\def\summarycontents{% 5507 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 5508 % 5509 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 5510 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 5511 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 5512 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 5513 \secfonts 5514 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 5515 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 5516 \rm 5517 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 5518 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 5519 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 5520 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 5521 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 5522 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5523 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5524 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5525 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5526 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5527 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5528 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 5529 \ifeof 1 \else 5530 \readtocfile 5531 \fi 5532 \closein 1 5533 \vfill \eject 5534 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 5535 \endgroup 5536 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 5537 \global\pageno = \savepageno 5538} 5539\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 5540 5541% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 5542% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 5543% 5544\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 5545 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 5546 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 5547 % But use \hss just in case. 5548 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 5549 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 5550 % 5551 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 5552 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 5553 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 5554 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 5555 % there are before deciding ... 5556 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 5557} 5558 5559% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 5560% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 5561% The last argument is the page number. 5562% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 5563 5564% Chapters, in the main contents. 5565\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5566% 5567% Chapters, in the short toc. 5568% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 5569\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 5570 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 5571} 5572 5573% Appendices, in the main contents. 5574% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 5575% 5576\def\appendixbox#1{% 5577 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 5578 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 5579 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 5580% 5581\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5582 5583% Unnumbered chapters. 5584\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 5585\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 5586 5587% Sections. 5588\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5589\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 5590\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 5591 5592% Subsections. 5593\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5594\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 5595\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 5596 5597% And subsubsections. 5598\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5599\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 5600\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 5601 5602% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 5603% Same as \defaultparindent. 5604\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 5605 5606% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 5607% page number. 5608% 5609% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 5610% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 5611\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 5612 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 5613 \begingroup 5614 \chapentryfonts 5615 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5616 \endgroup 5617 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 5618} 5619 5620\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5621 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 5622 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5623\endgroup} 5624 5625\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5626 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 5627 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5628\endgroup} 5629 5630\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5631 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 5632 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5633\endgroup} 5634 5635% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 5636\let\tocentry = \entry 5637 5638% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 5639\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 5640 5641\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 5642\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 5643 5644\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 5645\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 5646\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 5647\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 5648 5649 5650\message{environments,} 5651% @foo ... @end foo. 5652 5653% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 5654% 5655% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of 5656% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 5657% 5658\def\point{$\star$} 5659\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 5660\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 5661\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 5662\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 5663 5664% The @error{} command. 5665% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 5666% 5667\newbox\errorbox 5668% 5669{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 5670\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 5671% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 5672\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt} 5673% 5674\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 5675 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 5676 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 5677 \vbox{% 5678 \hrule height\dimen2 5679 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 5680 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 5681 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 5682 \hrule height\dimen2} 5683 \hfil} 5684% 5685\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 5686 5687% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. 5688% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 5689% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. 5690 5691\envdef\tex{% 5692 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 5693 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 5694 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 5695 \catcode `\%=14 5696 \catcode `\+=\other 5697 \catcode `\"=\other 5698 \catcode `\|=\other 5699 \catcode `\<=\other 5700 \catcode `\>=\other 5701 \escapechar=`\\ 5702 % 5703 \let\b=\ptexb 5704 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 5705 \let\c=\ptexc 5706 \let\,=\ptexcomma 5707 \let\.=\ptexdot 5708 \let\dots=\ptexdots 5709 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 5710 \let\!=\ptexexclam 5711 \let\i=\ptexi 5712 \let\indent=\ptexindent 5713 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 5714 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 5715 \let\+=\tabalign 5716 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 5717 \let\/=\ptexslash 5718 \let\*=\ptexstar 5719 \let\t=\ptext 5720 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 5721 % 5722 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 5723 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 5724 \def\@{@}% 5725} 5726% There is no need to define \Etex. 5727 5728% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 5729% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 5730% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 5731 5732% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 5733\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 5734 5735% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 5736% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 5737% have any width. 5738\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 5739 5740% This space is always present above and below environments. 5741\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 5742 5743% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 5744% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 5745% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 5746% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 5747% 5748\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 5749 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 5750 % \sectionheading, q.v. 5751 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 5752 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 5753 \endgraf 5754 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 5755 \removelastskip 5756 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 5757 % or better ... 5758 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 5759 \vskip\envskipamount 5760 \fi 5761 \fi 5762}} 5763 5764\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak 5765 5766% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 5767% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 5768\let\nonarrowing=\relax 5769 5770% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 5771% environment contents. 5772\font\circle=lcircle10 5773\newdimen\circthick 5774\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 5775\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 5776\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 5777% 5778\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 5779\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 5780\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 5781\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 5782\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 5783 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 5784 \hskip\rskip}} 5785\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 5786 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 5787 \hskip\rskip}} 5788% 5789\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 5790 5791\envdef\cartouche{% 5792 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 5793 \startsavinginserts 5794 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 5795 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 5796 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 5797 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 5798 \cartouter=\hsize 5799 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 5800 % side, and for 6pt waste from 5801 % each corner char, and rule thickness 5802 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 5803 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. 5804 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5805 \vbox\bgroup 5806 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 5807 \carttop 5808 \hbox\bgroup 5809 \hskip\lskip 5810 \vrule\kern3pt 5811 \vbox\bgroup 5812 \kern3pt 5813 \hsize=\cartinner 5814 \baselineskip=\normbskip 5815 \lineskip=\normlskip 5816 \parskip=\normpskip 5817 \vskip -\parskip 5818 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. 5819} 5820\def\Ecartouche{% 5821 \ifhmode\par\fi 5822 \kern3pt 5823 \egroup 5824 \kern3pt\vrule 5825 \hskip\rskip 5826 \egroup 5827 \cartbot 5828 \egroup 5829 \checkinserts 5830} 5831 5832 5833% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 5834% inside a group. 5835\def\nonfillstart{% 5836 \aboveenvbreak 5837 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy 5838 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 5839 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 5840 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 5841 \parskip = 0pt 5842 \parindent = 0pt 5843 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 5844 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 5845 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 5846 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 5847 \else 5848 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 5849 \fi 5850 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 5851} 5852 5853% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 5854% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 5855% This affects the following displayed environments: 5856% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 5857% 5858\def\smallword{small} 5859\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 5860\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 5861\def\setnormaldispenv{% 5862 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 5863 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 5864 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 5865 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 5866 % to change the fonts afterward. 5867 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 5868 \smallexamplefonts \rm 5869 \fi 5870} 5871\def\setsmalldispenv{% 5872 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 5873 \else 5874 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 5875 \smallexamplefonts \rm 5876 \fi 5877} 5878 5879% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 5880% Let's do it by one command: 5881\def\makedispenv #1#2{ 5882 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} 5883 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} 5884 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 5885 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 5886} 5887 5888% Define two synonyms: 5889\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ 5890 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} 5891 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} 5892} 5893 5894% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. 5895% 5896% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 5897% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 5898% 5899\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% 5900 \nonfillstart 5901 \tt\quoteexpand 5902 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 5903 \gobble % eat return 5904} 5905% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 5906% 5907\makedispenv {display}{% 5908 \nonfillstart 5909 \gobble 5910} 5911 5912% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 5913% 5914\makedispenv{format}{% 5915 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5916 \nonfillstart 5917 \gobble 5918} 5919 5920% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 5921\envdef\flushleft{% 5922 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5923 \nonfillstart 5924 \gobble 5925} 5926\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 5927 5928% @flushright. 5929% 5930\envdef\flushright{% 5931 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5932 \nonfillstart 5933 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5934 \gobble 5935} 5936\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 5937 5938 5939% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 5940% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 5941% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 5942% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 5943% 5944\envdef\quotation{% 5945 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 5946 \parindent=0pt 5947 % 5948 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 5949 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 5950 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 5951 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 5952 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 5953 \else 5954 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 5955 \fi 5956 \parsearg\quotationlabel 5957} 5958 5959% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 5960% doing normal filling. 5961% 5962\def\Equotation{% 5963 \par 5964 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else 5965 % indent a bit. 5966 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 5967 \fi 5968 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 5969} 5970 5971% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 5972\def\quotationlabel#1{% 5973 \def\temp{#1}% 5974 \ifx\temp\empty \else 5975 {\bf #1: }% 5976 \fi 5977} 5978 5979 5980% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 5981% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 5982% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 5983% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 5984% 5985% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 5986% 5987% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 5988% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 5989% verbatim line. 5990\def\dospecials{% 5991 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 5992 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 5993 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 5994} 5995% 5996% [Knuth] p. 380 5997\def\uncatcodespecials{% 5998 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 5999% 6000% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 6001% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font 6002\begingroup 6003 \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} 6004\endgroup 6005% 6006% Setup for the @verb command. 6007% 6008% Eight spaces for a tab 6009\begingroup 6010 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6011 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 6012\endgroup 6013% 6014\def\setupverb{% 6015 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6016 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 6017 \catcode`\`=\active 6018 \tabeightspaces 6019 % Respect line breaks, 6020 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6021 % make each space count 6022 % must do in this order: 6023 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6024} 6025 6026% Setup for the @verbatim environment 6027% 6028% Real tab expansion 6029\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 6030% 6031\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} 6032 6033% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right 6034% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote 6035% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it 6036% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least 6037% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the 6038% regular 0x27. 6039% 6040\def\codequoteright{% 6041 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 6042 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 6043 '% 6044 \else \char'15 \fi 6045 \else \char'15 \fi 6046} 6047% 6048% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 6049% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 6050% the code environments to do likewise. 6051% 6052\def\codequoteleft{% 6053 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 6054 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 6055 `% 6056 \else \char'22 \fi 6057 \else \char'22 \fi 6058} 6059% 6060\begingroup 6061 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6062 \gdef\tabexpand{% 6063 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6064 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 6065 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab 6066 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw 6067 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 6068 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 6069 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox 6070 }% 6071 } 6072 \catcode`\'=\active 6073 \gdef\rquoteexpand{\catcode\rquoteChar=\active \def'{\codequoteright}}% 6074 % 6075 \catcode`\`=\active 6076 \gdef\lquoteexpand{\catcode\lquoteChar=\active \def`{\codequoteleft}}% 6077 % 6078 \gdef\quoteexpand{\rquoteexpand \lquoteexpand}% 6079\endgroup 6080 6081% start the verbatim environment. 6082\def\setupverbatim{% 6083 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6084 \nonfillstart 6085 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6086 \tt 6087 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% 6088 \catcode`\`=\active 6089 \tabexpand 6090 \quoteexpand 6091 % Respect line breaks, 6092 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6093 % make each space count 6094 % must do in this order: 6095 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6096 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 6097} 6098 6099% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 6100% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 6101% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 6102% 6103% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 6104% 6105% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 6106\begingroup 6107 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 6108 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 6109\endgroup 6110% 6111\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 6112% 6113% 6114% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 6115% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 6116% 6117% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 6118% 6119% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 6120% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 6121% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 6122% 6123% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 6124% 6125\begingroup 6126 \catcode`\ =\active 6127 \obeylines % 6128 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 6129 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 6130 % line in the output. 6131 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 6132 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 6133 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 6134\endgroup 6135% 6136\envdef\verbatim{% 6137 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 6138} 6139\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 6140 6141 6142% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 6143% 6144\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 6145% 6146\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 6147 {% 6148 \makevalueexpandable 6149 \setupverbatim 6150 \input #1 6151 \afterenvbreak 6152 }% 6153} 6154 6155% @copying ... @end copying. 6156% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 6157% 6158% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 6159% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 6160% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 6161% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 6162% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 6163% possible is very desirable. 6164% 6165\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 6166\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 6167% 6168\def\insertcopying{% 6169 \begingroup 6170 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 6171 \scanexp\copyingtext 6172 \endgroup 6173} 6174 6175 6176\message{defuns,} 6177% @defun etc. 6178 6179\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 6180\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 6181\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 6182\newcount\defunpenalty 6183 6184% Start the processing of @deffn: 6185\def\startdefun{% 6186 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 6187 \medbreak 6188 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 6189 % following @def command, see below. 6190 \else 6191 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 6192 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 6193 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 6194 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 6195 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 6196 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 6197 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 6198 % 6199 % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 6200 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 6201 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 6202 % @def command. 6203 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6204 % 6205 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 6206 % But do insert the glue. 6207 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 6208 \fi 6209 % 6210 \parindent=0in 6211 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 6212 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6213} 6214 6215\def\dodefunx#1{% 6216 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 6217 \checkenv#1% 6218 % 6219 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 6220 % It's not a great place, though. 6221 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6222 % 6223 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 6224 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 6225} 6226\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 6227 6228% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 6229% 6230\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 6231 \begingroup 6232 % call \deffnheader: 6233 #1#2 \endheader 6234 % common ending: 6235 \interlinepenalty = 10000 6236 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil 6237 \endgraf 6238 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 6239 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 6240 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 6241 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 6242 \checkparencounts 6243 \endgroup 6244} 6245 6246\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 6247 6248% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 6249% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader. 6250% 6251\def\makedefun#1{% 6252 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 6253 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 6254 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 6255 \temp 6256} 6257 6258% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader 6259% 6260% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 6261% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 6262% 6263\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 6264 \envdef#1{% 6265 \startdefun 6266 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 6267 }% 6268 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 6269 \def#3% 6270} 6271 6272%%% Untyped functions: 6273 6274% @deffn category name args 6275\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 6276 6277% @deffn category class name args 6278\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6279 6280% \defopon {category on}class name args 6281\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6282 6283% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 6284% 6285\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 6286 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 6287 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 6288 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 6289} 6290 6291%%% Typed functions: 6292 6293% @deftypefn category type name args 6294\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 6295 6296% @deftypeop category class type name args 6297\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6298 6299% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 6300\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6301 6302% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 6303% 6304\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6305 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6306 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6307} 6308 6309%%% Typed variables: 6310 6311% @deftypevr category type var args 6312\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 6313 6314% @deftypecv category class type var args 6315\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6316 6317% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 6318\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6319 6320% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 6321% 6322\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6323 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6324 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6325} 6326 6327%%% Untyped variables: 6328 6329% @defvr category var args 6330\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 6331 6332% @defcv category class var args 6333\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6334 6335% \defcvof {category of}class var args 6336\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 6337 6338%%% Type: 6339% @deftp category name args 6340\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 6341 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 6342 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 6343} 6344 6345% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 6346\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6347\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 6348\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 6349\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6350\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6351\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 6352\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6353\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 6354\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 6355\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6356\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6357 6358% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 6359% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 6360% #2 is the return type, if any. 6361% #3 is the function name. 6362% 6363% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 6364% 6365\def\defname#1#2#3{% 6366 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 6367 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 6368 % 6369 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps 6370 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 6371 % just below it. 6372 \def\temp{#1}% 6373 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 6374 % 6375 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. 6376 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 6377 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 6378 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 6379 % The continuations: 6380 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 6381 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) 6382 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 6383 % 6384 % Put the type name to the right margin. 6385 \noindent 6386 \hbox to 0pt{% 6387 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 6388 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 6389 \kern\leftskip 6390 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 6391 }% 6392 % 6393 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 6394 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 6395 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6396 {% 6397 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 6398 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 6399 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 6400 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 6401 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 6402 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 6403 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 6404 % one has made identifiers using them :). 6405 \df \tt 6406 \def\temp{#2}% return value type 6407 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi 6408 #3% output function name 6409 }% 6410 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm 6411 % 6412 \boldbrax 6413 % arguments will be output next, if any. 6414} 6415 6416% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 6417% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 6418% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 6419% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 6420% 6421\def\defunargs#1{% 6422 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 6423 % tt for the names. 6424 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 6425 % 6426 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 6427 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. 6428 \let\var=\ttslanted 6429 #1% 6430 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 6431} 6432 6433% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 6434% 6435\def\activeparens{% 6436 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 6437 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 6438 \catcode`\&=\active 6439} 6440 6441% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 6442\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 6443 6444% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 6445% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 6446% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 6447{ 6448 \activeparens 6449 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 6450 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 6451 \global\let& = \& 6452 6453 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 6454 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 6455} 6456 6457\newcount\parencount 6458 6459% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 6460\newif\ifampseen 6461\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 6462 6463\def\parenfont{% 6464 \ifampseen 6465 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 6466 % otherwise use the default font. 6467 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 6468 \else 6469 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 6470 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 6471 \sf 6472 \fi 6473} 6474\def\infirstlevel#1{% 6475 \ifampseen 6476 \ifnum\parencount=1 6477 #1% 6478 \fi 6479 \fi 6480} 6481\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 6482 6483\def\opnr{% 6484 \global\advance\parencount by 1 6485 {\parenfont(}% 6486 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 6487} 6488\def\clnr{% 6489 {\parenfont)}% 6490 \infirstlevel \sl 6491 \global\advance\parencount by -1 6492} 6493 6494\newcount\brackcount 6495\def\lbrb{% 6496 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 6497 {\bf[}% 6498} 6499\def\rbrb{% 6500 {\bf]}% 6501 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 6502} 6503 6504\def\checkparencounts{% 6505 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 6506 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 6507} 6508% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 6509% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 6510\def\badparencount{% 6511 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 6512 \global\parencount=0 6513} 6514\def\badbrackcount{% 6515 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 6516 \global\brackcount=0 6517} 6518 6519 6520\message{macros,} 6521% @macro. 6522 6523% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 6524% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 6525\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined 6526 \newwrite\macscribble 6527 \def\scantokens#1{% 6528 \toks0={#1}% 6529 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 6530 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 6531 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 6532 \input \jobname.tmp 6533 } 6534\fi 6535 6536\def\scanmacro#1{% 6537 \begingroup 6538 \newlinechar`\^^M 6539 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces 6540 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex 6541 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active 6542 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had 6543 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears 6544 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 6545 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ 6546 % ... and \example 6547 \spaceisspace 6548 % 6549 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. 6550 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX 6551 % --kasal, 29nov03 6552 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% 6553 \endgroup 6554} 6555 6556\def\scanexp#1{% 6557 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% 6558 \temp 6559} 6560 6561\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 6562\newtoks\macname % Macro name 6563\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 6564 6565% List of all defined macros in the form 6566% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... 6567% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 6568% if there is a need. 6569\def\macrolist{} 6570 6571% Add the macro to \macrolist 6572\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 6573\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 6574 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% 6575 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 6576} 6577 6578% Utility routines. 6579% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 6580% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 6581% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 6582% 6583\def\cslet#1#2{% 6584 \expandafter\let 6585 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 6586 \csname#2\endcsname 6587} 6588 6589% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 6590% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 6591{\catcode`\@=11 6592\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 6593\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 6594\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 6595\def\unbrace#1{#1} 6596\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 6597} 6598 6599% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 6600{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 6601\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 6602\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 6603\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 6604} 6605 6606% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 6607% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 6608% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. 6609 6610% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 6611% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 6612% confine the change to the current group. 6613 6614% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 6615% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 6616% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 6617 6618\def\scanctxt{% 6619 \catcode`\"=\other 6620 \catcode`\+=\other 6621 \catcode`\<=\other 6622 \catcode`\>=\other 6623 \catcode`\@=\other 6624 \catcode`\^=\other 6625 \catcode`\_=\other 6626 \catcode`\|=\other 6627 \catcode`\~=\other 6628 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi 6629} 6630 6631\def\scanargctxt{% 6632 \scanctxt 6633 \catcode`\\=\other 6634 \catcode`\^^M=\other 6635} 6636 6637\def\macrobodyctxt{% 6638 \scanctxt 6639 \catcode`\{=\other 6640 \catcode`\}=\other 6641 \catcode`\^^M=\other 6642 \usembodybackslash 6643} 6644 6645\def\macroargctxt{% 6646 \scanctxt 6647 \catcode`\\=\other 6648} 6649 6650% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 6651% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 6652% where N is the macro parameter number. 6653% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 6654% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 6655 6656{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 6657 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 6658 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 6659} 6660\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 6661 6662\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 6663\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 6664 6665\def\macroxxx#1{% 6666 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 6667 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 6668 \paramno=0% 6669 \else 6670 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 6671 \fi 6672 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 6673 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 6674 \else 6675 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 6676 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 6677 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 6678 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 6679 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 6680 \fi 6681 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 6682 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 6683 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 6684 \fi} 6685 6686\parseargdef\unmacro{% 6687 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 6688 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 6689 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 6690 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 6691 \begingroup 6692 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 6693 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo 6694 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 6695 \endgroup 6696 \else 6697 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 6698 \fi 6699} 6700 6701% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 6702% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 6703% 6704\def\unmacrodo#1{% 6705 \ifx #1\relax 6706 % remove this 6707 \else 6708 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% 6709 \fi 6710} 6711 6712% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a 6713% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 6714% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 6715\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 6716\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 6717\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 6718\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 6719 6720% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist 6721% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah 6722% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. 6723% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 6724 6725% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. 6726% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something 6727% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine 6728% it to # just before using the token list produced. 6729% 6730% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before 6731% the macro is used. 6732 6733\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 6734 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} 6735\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 6736 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 6737 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 6738 \advance\paramno by 1% 6739 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 6740 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 6741 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 6742 \fi\next} 6743 6744% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. 6745% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 6746 6747\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% 6748{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 6749\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% 6750{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 6751 6752% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and 6753% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. 6754% Much magic with \expandafter here. 6755% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 6756% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. 6757\def\defmacro{% 6758 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 6759 \ifrecursive 6760 \ifcase\paramno 6761 % 0 6762 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6763 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6764 \or % 1 6765 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6766 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6767 \noexpand\braceorline 6768 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 6769 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 6770 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6771 \else % many 6772 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6773 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6774 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 6775 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 6776 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 6777 \expandafter\expandafter 6778 \expandafter\xdef 6779 \expandafter\expandafter 6780 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 6781 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6782 \fi 6783 \else 6784 \ifcase\paramno 6785 % 0 6786 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6787 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6788 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6789 \or % 1 6790 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6791 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6792 \noexpand\braceorline 6793 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 6794 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 6795 \egroup 6796 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6797 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6798 \else % many 6799 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6800 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6801 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 6802 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 6803 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 6804 \expandafter\expandafter 6805 \expandafter\xdef 6806 \expandafter\expandafter 6807 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 6808 \paramlist{% 6809 \egroup 6810 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6811 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6812 \fi 6813 \fi} 6814 6815\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 6816 6817% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a 6818% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole 6819% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence 6820% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) 6821\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 6822\def\braceorlinexxx{% 6823 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else 6824 \expandafter\parsearg 6825 \fi \macnamexxx} 6826 6827 6828% @alias. 6829% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 6830% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 6831\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 6832\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 6833\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 6834 {% 6835 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 6836 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 6837 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 6838 }% 6839 \next 6840} 6841 6842 6843\message{cross references,} 6844 6845\newwrite\auxfile 6846\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 6847\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 6848 6849% @inforef is relatively simple. 6850\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 6851\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 6852 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 6853 6854% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 6855% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 6856% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 6857% @node foo , bar , ... 6858% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 6859% 6860\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 6861% 6862% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 6863% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 6864\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 6865\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 6866 6867\let\nwnode=\node 6868\let\lastnode=\empty 6869 6870% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 6871% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 6872% 6873\def\donoderef#1{% 6874 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 6875 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 6876 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 6877 \fi 6878} 6879 6880% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 6881% 6882\newcount\savesfregister 6883% 6884\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 6885\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 6886\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 6887 6888% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 6889% anchor), which consists of three parts: 6890% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 6891% or the anchor name. 6892% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 6893% empty for anchors. 6894% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 6895% 6896% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 6897% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 6898% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 6899% 6900\def\setref#1#2{% 6901 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 6902 \iflinks 6903 {% 6904 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 6905 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 6906 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 6907 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 6908 }% 6909 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 6910 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 6911 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 6912 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout 6913 }% 6914 \fi 6915} 6916 6917% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 6918% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 6919% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 6920% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 6921% 6922\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6923\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6924\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6925\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 6926 \unsepspaces 6927 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 6928 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 6929 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 6930 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 6931 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt 6932 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 6933 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax 6934 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. 6935 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6936 \else 6937 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside 6938 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. 6939 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 6940 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. 6941 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6942 \else 6943 \ifhavexrefs 6944 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. 6945 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 6946 \else 6947 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 6948 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6949 \fi% 6950 \fi 6951 \fi 6952 \fi 6953 % 6954 % Make link in pdf output. 6955 \ifpdf 6956 \leavevmode 6957 \getfilename{#4}% 6958 {\indexnofonts 6959 \turnoffactive 6960 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. 6961 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% 6962 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% 6963 % 6964 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 6965 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 6966 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% 6967 \else 6968 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 6969 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% 6970 \fi 6971 }% 6972 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 6973 \fi 6974 % 6975 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 6976 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the 6977 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. 6978 {% 6979 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 6980 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 6981 \indexnofonts 6982 \turnoffactive 6983 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 6984 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 6985 }% 6986 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 6987 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 6988 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 6989 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt 6990 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 6991 \else 6992 \printedrefname 6993 \fi 6994 % 6995 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 6996 % "in MANUALNAME". 6997 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 6998 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 6999 \fi 7000 \else 7001 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 7002 % 7003 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not 7004 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will 7005 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 7006 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this 7007 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it 7008 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 7009 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 7010 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 7011 \else 7012 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 7013 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 7014 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 7015 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 7016 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 7017 {\turnoffactive 7018 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 7019 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 7020 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 7021 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 7022 }% 7023 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. 7024 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 7025 % 7026 % But we always want a comma and a space: 7027 ,\space 7028 % 7029 % output the `page 3'. 7030 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 7031 \fi 7032 \fi 7033 \endlink 7034\endgroup} 7035 7036% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 7037% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 7038% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 7039% one that Bob is working on :). 7040% 7041\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 7042 7043% Things referred to by \setref. 7044% 7045\def\Ynothing{} 7046\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 7047\def\Ynumbered{% 7048 \ifnum\secno=0 7049 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 7050 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 7051 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 7052 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 7053 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 7054 \else 7055 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 7056 \fi\fi\fi 7057} 7058\def\Yappendix{% 7059 \ifnum\secno=0 7060 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 7061 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 7062 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 7063 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 7064 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 7065 \else 7066 \putwordSection@tie 7067 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 7068 \fi\fi\fi 7069} 7070 7071% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 7072% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. 7073% 7074\def\refx#1#2{% 7075 {% 7076 \indexnofonts 7077 \otherbackslash 7078 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 7079 \csname XR#1\endcsname 7080 }% 7081 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 7082 % If not defined, say something at least. 7083 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 7084 \iflinks 7085 \ifhavexrefs 7086 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% 7087 \else 7088 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 7089 \global\warnedxrefstrue 7090 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 7091 \fi 7092 \fi 7093 \fi 7094 \else 7095 % It's defined, so just use it. 7096 \thisrefX 7097 \fi 7098 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 7099} 7100 7101% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's 7102% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid 7103% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. 7104% 7105\def\xrdef#1#2{% 7106 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current 7107 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these 7108 % mess up the control sequence name. 7109 \indexnofonts 7110 \turnoffactive 7111 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 7112 }% 7113 % 7114 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref 7115 % 7116 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 7117 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 7118 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 7119 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 7120 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 7121 % 7122 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 7123 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 7124 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 7125 \else 7126 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 7127 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 7128 \fi 7129 % 7130 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 7131 % for later use in \listoffloats. 7132 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 7133 {\safexrefname}}% 7134 \fi 7135} 7136 7137% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 7138% 7139\def\tryauxfile{% 7140 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 7141 \ifeof 1 \else 7142 \readdatafile{aux}% 7143 \global\havexrefstrue 7144 \fi 7145 \closein 1 7146} 7147 7148\def\setupdatafile{% 7149 \catcode`\^^@=\other 7150 \catcode`\^^A=\other 7151 \catcode`\^^B=\other 7152 \catcode`\^^C=\other 7153 \catcode`\^^D=\other 7154 \catcode`\^^E=\other 7155 \catcode`\^^F=\other 7156 \catcode`\^^G=\other 7157 \catcode`\^^H=\other 7158 \catcode`\^^K=\other 7159 \catcode`\^^L=\other 7160 \catcode`\^^N=\other 7161 \catcode`\^^P=\other 7162 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 7163 \catcode`\^^R=\other 7164 \catcode`\^^S=\other 7165 \catcode`\^^T=\other 7166 \catcode`\^^U=\other 7167 \catcode`\^^V=\other 7168 \catcode`\^^W=\other 7169 \catcode`\^^X=\other 7170 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 7171 \catcode`\^^[=\other 7172 \catcode`\^^\=\other 7173 \catcode`\^^]=\other 7174 \catcode`\^^^=\other 7175 \catcode`\^^_=\other 7176 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 7177 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 7178 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 7179 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 7180 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 7181 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 7182 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 7183 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 7184 % 7185 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 7186 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 7187 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 7188 % 7189 \catcode`\^=\other 7190 % 7191 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 7192 \catcode`\~=\other 7193 \catcode`\[=\other 7194 \catcode`\]=\other 7195 \catcode`\"=\other 7196 \catcode`\_=\other 7197 \catcode`\|=\other 7198 \catcode`\<=\other 7199 \catcode`\>=\other 7200 \catcode`\$=\other 7201 \catcode`\#=\other 7202 \catcode`\&=\other 7203 \catcode`\%=\other 7204 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 7205 % 7206 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 7207 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 7208 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 7209 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 7210 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 7211 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 7212 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 7213 \catcode`\\=\other 7214 % 7215 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. 7216 {% 7217 \count1=128 7218 \def\loop{% 7219 \catcode\count1=\other 7220 \advance\count1 by 1 7221 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi 7222 }% 7223 }% 7224 % 7225 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 7226 \catcode`\{=1 7227 \catcode`\}=2 7228 \catcode`\@=0 7229} 7230 7231\def\readdatafile#1{% 7232\begingroup 7233 \setupdatafile 7234 \input\jobname.#1 7235\endgroup} 7236 7237 7238\message{insertions,} 7239% including footnotes. 7240 7241\newcount \footnoteno 7242 7243% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 7244% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 7245% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 7246% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 7247% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 7248\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 7249 7250% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. 7251\let\footnotestyle=\comment 7252 7253{\catcode `\@=11 7254% 7255% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 7256\gdef\footnote{% 7257 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7258 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7259 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 7260 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 7261 % 7262 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 7263 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 7264 \let\@sf\empty 7265 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 7266 % 7267 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 7268 \unskip 7269 \thisfootno\@sf 7270 \dofootnote 7271}% 7272 7273% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 7274% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 7275% 7276% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 7277% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 7278% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 7279% 7280\gdef\dofootnote{% 7281 \insert\footins\bgroup 7282 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 7283 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 7284 % So reset some parameters. 7285 \hsize=\pagewidth 7286 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 7287 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 7288 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 7289 \floatingpenalty\@MM 7290 \leftskip\z@skip 7291 \rightskip\z@skip 7292 \spaceskip\z@skip 7293 \xspaceskip\z@skip 7294 \parindent\defaultparindent 7295 % 7296 \smallfonts \rm 7297 % 7298 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 7299 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 7300 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 7301 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 7302 \let\noindent = \relax 7303 % 7304 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 7305 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 7306 \everypar = {\hang}% 7307 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 7308 % 7309 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 7310 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 7311 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 7312 \footstrut 7313 \futurelet\next\fo@t 7314} 7315}%end \catcode `\@=11 7316 7317% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 7318% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 7319% would be lost. 7320% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 7321% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 7322% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 7323 7324% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 7325% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 7326% out prematurely. 7327% 7328\def\startsavinginserts{% 7329 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 7330 \let\insert\saveinsert 7331 \else 7332 \let\checkinserts\relax 7333 \fi 7334} 7335 7336% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 7337% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 7338% 7339\def\saveinsert#1{% 7340 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 7341 \afterassignment\next 7342 % swallow the left brace 7343 \let\temp = 7344} 7345\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 7346\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 7347 7348\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 7349 7350\def\placesaveins#1{% 7351 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 7352 {\box#1}% 7353} 7354 7355% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 7356{ 7357 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 7358 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 7359} 7360 7361% initialization: 7362\def\newsaveins #1{% 7363 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 7364 \next 7365} 7366\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 7367 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 7368 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 7369 \checksaveins #1}% 7370} 7371 7372% initialize: 7373\let\checkinserts\empty 7374\newsaveins\footins 7375\newsaveins\margin 7376 7377 7378% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 7379% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 7380% 7381% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 7382% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 7383% undone and the next image would fail. 7384\openin 1 = epsf.tex 7385\ifeof 1 \else 7386 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 7387 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 7388 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 7389 \input epsf.tex 7390\fi 7391\closein 1 7392% 7393% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 7394\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 7395\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 7396 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 7397 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 7398% 7399\def\image#1{% 7400 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined 7401 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 7402 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 7403 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 7404 \global\warnednoepsftrue 7405 \fi 7406 \else 7407 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 7408 \fi 7409} 7410% 7411% Arguments to @image: 7412% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 7413% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 7414% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 7415% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 7416% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. 7417\newif\ifimagevmode 7418\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 7419 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 7420 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 7421 % If the image is by itself, center it. 7422 \ifvmode 7423 \imagevmodetrue 7424 \nobreak\bigskip 7425 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 7426 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 7427 % above and below. 7428 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 7429 \nobreak 7430 \line\bgroup 7431 \fi 7432 % 7433 % Output the image. 7434 \ifpdf 7435 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 7436 \else 7437 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 7438 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 7439 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 7440 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 7441 \fi 7442 % 7443 \ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image 7444\endgroup} 7445 7446 7447% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 7448% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 7449% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 7450% 7451\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 7452 7453% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 7454\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 7455 7456% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 7457% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 7458% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 7459% 7460% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 7461% be referable. 7462% 7463% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 7464% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 7465% 7466% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 7467% chapter-level command. 7468\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 7469% 7470\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 7471 \let\thiscaption=\empty 7472 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 7473 % 7474 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 7475 % 7476 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 7477 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 7478 % 7479 \startsavinginserts 7480 % 7481 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 7482 \par 7483 % 7484 \vtop\bgroup 7485 \def\floattype{#1}% 7486 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 7487 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 7488 % 7489 \ifx\floattype\empty 7490 \let\safefloattype=\empty 7491 \else 7492 {% 7493 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 7494 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 7495 \indexnofonts 7496 \turnoffactive 7497 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 7498 }% 7499 \fi 7500 % 7501 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 7502 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7503 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 7504 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 7505 % 7506 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 7507 \global\advance\floatno by 1 7508 % 7509 {% 7510 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 7511 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 7512 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 7513 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 7514 % lists of floats. 7515 % 7516 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 7517 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 7518 }% 7519 \fi 7520 % 7521 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 7522 \vskip\parskip 7523 % 7524 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 7525 \restorefirstparagraphindent 7526} 7527 7528% we have these possibilities: 7529% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 7530% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 7531% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 7532% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 7533% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 7534% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 7535% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 7536% @float & no caption: 7537% 7538\def\Efloat{% 7539 \let\floatident = \empty 7540 % 7541 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 7542 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 7543 % 7544 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 7545 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7546 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 7547 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 7548 \fi 7549 % the number. 7550 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 7551 \fi 7552 % 7553 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 7554 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 7555 \let\captionline = \floatident 7556 % 7557 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 7558 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 7559 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 7560 \fi 7561 % 7562 % caption text. 7563 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 7564 \fi 7565 % 7566 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 7567 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 7568 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 7569 \vskip.5\parskip 7570 \captionline 7571 % 7572 % Space below caption. 7573 \vskip\parskip 7574 \fi 7575 % 7576 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 7577 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 7578 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7579 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 7580 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 7581 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 7582 {% 7583 \atdummies 7584 % 7585 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M 7586 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so 7587 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. 7588 \scanexp{% 7589 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% 7590 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 7591 \thiscaption 7592 \else 7593 \thisshortcaption 7594 \fi 7595 }% 7596 }% 7597 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 7598 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 7599 }% 7600 \fi 7601 \egroup % end of \vtop 7602 % 7603 % place the captured inserts 7604 % 7605 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning 7606 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly 7607 % float. --kasal, 26may04 7608 % 7609 \checkinserts 7610} 7611 7612% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 7613% 7614\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 7615 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 7616} 7617 7618% @caption, @shortcaption 7619% 7620\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 7621\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 7622\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 7623\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 7624 7625% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 7626% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 7627\def\getfloatno#1{% 7628 \ifx#1\relax 7629 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 7630 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 7631 % 7632 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 7633 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 7634 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 7635 \fi 7636 \let\floatno#1% 7637} 7638 7639% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 7640% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 7641% first read the @float command. 7642% 7643\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 7644 7645% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 7646% distinguish floats from other xref types. 7647\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 7648 7649% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 7650% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 7651% \lastsection value which we \setref above. 7652% 7653\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 7654% 7655% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 7656% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 7657% 7658\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 7659 \def\temp{#1}% 7660 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 7661 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 7662} 7663 7664% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 7665% 7666\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 7667 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 7668 {% 7669 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 7670 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 7671 \indexnofonts 7672 \turnoffactive 7673 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 7674 }% 7675 % 7676 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 7677 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 7678 \ifhavexrefs 7679 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 7680 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 7681 \fi 7682 \else 7683 \begingroup 7684 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 7685 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 7686 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 7687 \endgroup 7688 \fi 7689} 7690 7691% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 7692% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 7693% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 7694% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 7695% 7696% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 7697% they won't appear in the aux file). 7698% 7699\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 7700\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 7701 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 7702 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 7703 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 7704 % in pdf output. 7705 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 7706 % 7707 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 7708 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 7709 \writeentry 7710}} 7711 7712 7713\message{localization,} 7714 7715% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after 7716% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything 7717% properly. Single argument is the language (de) or locale (de_DE) 7718% abbreviation. It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file. 7719% 7720{ 7721 \catcode`\_ = \active 7722 \globaldefs=1 7723\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup 7724 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames 7725 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 7726 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 7727 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 7728 \ifeof 1 7729 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% 7730 \else 7731 \input txi-#1.tex 7732 \fi 7733 \closein 1 7734 \endgroup 7735\endgroup} 7736} 7737% 7738% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 7739% try txi-de.tex. 7740% 7741\def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 7742 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 7743 \ifeof 1 7744 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 7745 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 7746 \else 7747 \input txi-#1.tex 7748 \fi 7749 \closein 1 7750} 7751% 7752\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 7753is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory 7754should work if nowhere else does.} 7755 7756% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 7757% 7758\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 7759 \count255=128 7760 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 7761 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 7762 \advance\count255 by 1 7763 \repeat 7764} 7765 7766\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 7767 \count255=128 7768 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 7769 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 7770 \advance\count255 by 1 7771 \repeat 7772} 7773 7774% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 7775% according to the specified encoding. 7776% 7777\parseargdef\documentencoding{% 7778 % Encoding being declared for the document. 7779 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 7780 % 7781 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 7782 % to compare them with \ifx. 7783 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 7784 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 7785 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 7786 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 7787 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 7788 % 7789 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 7790 \asciichardefs 7791 % 7792 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 7793 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7794 \lattwochardefs 7795 % 7796 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 7797 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7798 \latonechardefs 7799 % 7800 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 7801 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7802 \latninechardefs 7803 % 7804 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 7805 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7806 \utfeightchardefs 7807 % 7808 \else 7809 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% 7810 % 7811 \fi % utfeight 7812 \fi % latnine 7813 \fi % latone 7814 \fi % lattwo 7815 \fi % ascii 7816} 7817 7818% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 7819% the default font encoding (OT1). 7820% 7821\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} 7822 7823% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 7824\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 7825 7826% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 7827% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 7828% macros containing the character definitions. 7829\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7830% 7831% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 7832\def\latonechardefs{% 7833 \gdef^^a0{~} 7834 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} 7835 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} 7836 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} 7837 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 7838 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} 7839 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} 7840 \gdef^^a7{\S} 7841 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 7842 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} 7843 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} 7844 \gdef^^ab{\missingcharmsg{LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} 7845 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} 7846 \gdef^^ad{\-} 7847 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} 7848 \gdef^^af{\={}} 7849 % 7850 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 7851 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} 7852 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} 7853 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} 7854 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 7855 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} 7856 \gdef^^b6{\P} 7857 % 7858 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} 7859 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 7860 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} 7861 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} 7862 % 7863 \gdef^^bb{\missingcharmsg{RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} 7864 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} 7865 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} 7866 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} 7867 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} 7868 % 7869 \gdef^^c0{\`A} 7870 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 7871 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 7872 \gdef^^c3{\~A} 7873 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 7874 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} 7875 \gdef^^c6{\AE} 7876 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 7877 \gdef^^c8{\`E} 7878 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 7879 \gdef^^ca{\^E} 7880 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 7881 \gdef^^cc{\`I} 7882 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 7883 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 7884 \gdef^^cf{\"I} 7885 % 7886 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}} 7887 \gdef^^d1{\~N} 7888 \gdef^^d2{\`O} 7889 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 7890 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 7891 \gdef^^d5{\~O} 7892 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 7893 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 7894 \gdef^^d8{\O} 7895 \gdef^^d9{\`U} 7896 \gdef^^da{\'U} 7897 \gdef^^db{\^U} 7898 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 7899 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 7900 \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}} 7901 \gdef^^df{\ss} 7902 % 7903 \gdef^^e0{\`a} 7904 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 7905 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 7906 \gdef^^e3{\~a} 7907 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 7908 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} 7909 \gdef^^e6{\ae} 7910 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 7911 \gdef^^e8{\`e} 7912 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 7913 \gdef^^ea{\^e} 7914 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 7915 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 7916 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 7917 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 7918 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 7919 % 7920 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}} 7921 \gdef^^f1{\~n} 7922 \gdef^^f2{\`o} 7923 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 7924 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 7925 \gdef^^f5{\~o} 7926 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 7927 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 7928 \gdef^^f8{\o} 7929 \gdef^^f9{\`u} 7930 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 7931 \gdef^^fb{\^u} 7932 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 7933 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 7934 \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}} 7935 \gdef^^ff{\"y} 7936} 7937 7938% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 7939\def\latninechardefs{% 7940 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 7941 \latonechardefs 7942 % 7943 \gdef^^a4{\euro} 7944 \gdef^^a6{\v S} 7945 \gdef^^a8{\v s} 7946 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} 7947 \gdef^^b8{\v z} 7948 \gdef^^bc{\OE} 7949 \gdef^^bd{\oe} 7950 \gdef^^be{\"Y} 7951} 7952 7953% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 7954\def\lattwochardefs{% 7955 \gdef^^a0{~} 7956 \gdef^^a1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}} 7957 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} 7958 \gdef^^a3{\L} 7959 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 7960 \gdef^^a5{\v L} 7961 \gdef^^a6{\'S} 7962 \gdef^^a7{\S} 7963 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 7964 \gdef^^a9{\v S} 7965 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} 7966 \gdef^^ab{\v T} 7967 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} 7968 \gdef^^ad{\-} 7969 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} 7970 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} 7971 % 7972 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 7973 \gdef^^b1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}} 7974 \gdef^^b2{\missingcharmsg{OGONEK}} 7975 \gdef^^b3{\l} 7976 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 7977 \gdef^^b5{\v l} 7978 \gdef^^b6{\'s} 7979 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} 7980 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 7981 \gdef^^b9{\v s} 7982 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} 7983 \gdef^^bb{\v t} 7984 \gdef^^bc{\'z} 7985 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} 7986 \gdef^^be{\v z} 7987 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} 7988 % 7989 \gdef^^c0{\'R} 7990 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 7991 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 7992 \gdef^^c3{\u A} 7993 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 7994 \gdef^^c5{\'L} 7995 \gdef^^c6{\'C} 7996 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 7997 \gdef^^c8{\v C} 7998 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 7999 \gdef^^ca{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}} 8000 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 8001 \gdef^^cc{\v E} 8002 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 8003 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 8004 \gdef^^cf{\v D} 8005 % 8006 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} 8007 \gdef^^d1{\'N} 8008 \gdef^^d2{\v N} 8009 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 8010 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 8011 \gdef^^d5{\H O} 8012 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 8013 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 8014 \gdef^^d8{\v R} 8015 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} 8016 \gdef^^da{\'U} 8017 \gdef^^db{\H U} 8018 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 8019 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 8020 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} 8021 \gdef^^df{\ss} 8022 % 8023 \gdef^^e0{\'r} 8024 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 8025 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 8026 \gdef^^e3{\u a} 8027 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 8028 \gdef^^e5{\'l} 8029 \gdef^^e6{\'c} 8030 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 8031 \gdef^^e8{\v c} 8032 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 8033 \gdef^^ea{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}} 8034 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 8035 \gdef^^ec{\v e} 8036 \gdef^^ed{\'\i} 8037 \gdef^^ee{\^\i} 8038 \gdef^^ef{\v d} 8039 % 8040 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} 8041 \gdef^^f1{\'n} 8042 \gdef^^f2{\v n} 8043 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 8044 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 8045 \gdef^^f5{\H o} 8046 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 8047 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 8048 \gdef^^f8{\v r} 8049 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} 8050 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 8051 \gdef^^fb{\H u} 8052 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 8053 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 8054 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} 8055 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 8056} 8057 8058% UTF-8 character definitions. 8059% 8060% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 8061% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 8062% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 8063% 8064\newcount\countUTFx 8065\newcount\countUTFy 8066\newcount\countUTFz 8067 8068\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 8069 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 8070% 8071\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 8072 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 8073% 8074\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 8075 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 8076 8077\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 8078 \ifx #1\relax 8079 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 8080 \else 8081 \expandafter #1% 8082 \fi 8083} 8084 8085\begingroup 8086 \catcode`\~13 8087 \catcode`\"12 8088 8089 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 8090 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 8091 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 8092 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 8093 \advance\countUTFx by 1 8094 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 8095 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 8096 \fi} 8097 8098 \countUTFx = "C2 8099 \countUTFy = "E0 8100 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8101 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} 8102 \UTFviiiLoop 8103 8104 \countUTFx = "E0 8105 \countUTFy = "F0 8106 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8107 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} 8108 \UTFviiiLoop 8109 8110 \countUTFx = "F0 8111 \countUTFy = "F4 8112 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8113 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} 8114 \UTFviiiLoop 8115\endgroup 8116 8117\begingroup 8118 \catcode`\"=12 8119 \catcode`\<=12 8120 \catcode`\.=12 8121 \catcode`\,=12 8122 \catcode`\;=12 8123 \catcode`\!=12 8124 \catcode`\~=13 8125 8126 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% 8127 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 8128 \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% 8129 \begingroup 8130 \parseXMLCharref 8131 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% 8132 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% 8133 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% 8134 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% 8135 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% 8136 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% 8137 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 8138 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 8139 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 8140 \endgroup} 8141 8142 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 8143 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 8144 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8145 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 8146 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 8147 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8148 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% 8149 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 8150 \parseUTFviiiA;% 8151 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8152 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% 8153 \else 8154 \parseUTFviiiA;% 8155 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8156 \parseUTFviiiA!% 8157 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% 8158 \fi\fi\fi 8159 } 8160 8161 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 8162 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 8163 \divide\countUTFz by 64 8164 \countUTFy = \countUTFz 8165 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 8166 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 8167 \advance\countUTFx by 128 8168 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 8169 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 8170 8171 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 8172 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 8173 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 8174 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 8175\endgroup 8176 8177\def\utfeightchardefs{% 8178 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} 8179 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} 8180 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} 8181 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} 8182 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} 8183 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} 8184 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} 8185 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} 8186 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} 8187 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} 8188 8189 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} 8190 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} 8191 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} 8192 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} 8193 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} 8194 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} 8195 8196 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} 8197 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} 8198 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} 8199 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} 8200 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} 8201 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} 8202 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} 8203 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} 8204 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} 8205 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} 8206 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} 8207 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} 8208 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} 8209 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} 8210 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} 8211 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} 8212 8213 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} 8214 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} 8215 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} 8216 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} 8217 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} 8218 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} 8219 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} 8220 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} 8221 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} 8222 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} 8223 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} 8224 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} 8225 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} 8226 8227 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} 8228 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} 8229 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} 8230 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} 8231 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} 8232 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} 8233 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} 8234 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} 8235 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} 8236 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} 8237 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} 8238 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} 8239 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} 8240 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} 8241 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} 8242 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} 8243 8244 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} 8245 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} 8246 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} 8247 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} 8248 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} 8249 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} 8250 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} 8251 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} 8252 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} 8253 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} 8254 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} 8255 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} 8256 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} 8257 8258 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} 8259 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} 8260 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} 8261 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} 8262 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} 8263 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} 8264 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} 8265 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} 8266 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} 8267 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} 8268 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} 8269 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} 8270 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} 8271 8272 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} 8273 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} 8274 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} 8275 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} 8276 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} 8277 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} 8278 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} 8279 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} 8280 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} 8281 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} 8282 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} 8283 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} 8284 8285 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} 8286 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} 8287 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} 8288 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} 8289 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} 8290 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} 8291 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} 8292 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} 8293 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} 8294 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} 8295 8296 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} 8297 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} 8298 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} 8299 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} 8300 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} 8301 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} 8302 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} 8303 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} 8304 8305 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} 8306 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} 8307 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} 8308 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} 8309 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} 8310 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} 8311 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} 8312 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} 8313 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} 8314 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} 8315 8316 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} 8317 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} 8318 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} 8319 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} 8320 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} 8321 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} 8322 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} 8323 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} 8324 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} 8325 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} 8326 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} 8327 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} 8328 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} 8329 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} 8330 8331 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} 8332 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} 8333 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} 8334 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} 8335 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} 8336 8337 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} 8338 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} 8339 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} 8340 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} 8341 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} 8342 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} 8343 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} 8344 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} 8345 8346 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} 8347 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} 8348 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} 8349 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} 8350 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} 8351 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} 8352 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} 8353 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} 8354 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} 8355 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} 8356 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} 8357 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} 8358 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} 8359 8360 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} 8361 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} 8362 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} 8363 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} 8364 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} 8365 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} 8366 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} 8367 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} 8368 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} 8369 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} 8370 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} 8371 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} 8372 8373 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} 8374 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} 8375 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} 8376 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} 8377 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} 8378 8379 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} 8380 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} 8381 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} 8382 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} 8383 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} 8384 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} 8385 8386 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} 8387 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} 8388 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} 8389 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} 8390 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} 8391 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} 8392 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} 8393 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} 8394 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} 8395 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} 8396 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} 8397 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} 8398 8399 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} 8400 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} 8401 8402 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} 8403 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} 8404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} 8405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} 8406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} 8407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} 8408 8409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} 8410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} 8411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} 8412 8413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} 8414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} 8415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} 8416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} 8417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} 8418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} 8419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} 8420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} 8421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} 8422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} 8423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} 8424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} 8425 8426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} 8427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} 8428 8429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} 8430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} 8431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} 8432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} 8433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} 8434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} 8435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} 8436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} 8437 8438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} 8439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} 8440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} 8441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} 8442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} 8443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} 8444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} 8445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} 8446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} 8447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} 8448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} 8449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} 8450 8451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} 8452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} 8453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} 8454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} 8455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} 8456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} 8457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} 8458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} 8459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} 8460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} 8461 8462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} 8463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} 8464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} 8465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} 8466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} 8467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} 8468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} 8469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} 8470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} 8471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} 8472 8473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} 8474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} 8475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} 8476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} 8477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} 8478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} 8479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} 8480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} 8481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} 8482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} 8483 8484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} 8485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} 8486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} 8487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} 8488 8489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} 8490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} 8491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} 8492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} 8493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} 8494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} 8495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} 8496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} 8497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} 8498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} 8499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} 8500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} 8501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} 8502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} 8503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} 8504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} 8505 8506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} 8507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} 8508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} 8509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} 8510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} 8511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} 8512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} 8513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} 8514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} 8515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} 8516 8517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} 8518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} 8519 8520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} 8521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} 8522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} 8523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} 8524 8525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} 8526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} 8527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} 8528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} 8529 8530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} 8531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} 8532 8533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} 8534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} 8535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} 8536 8537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} 8538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} 8539 8540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} 8541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} 8542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} 8543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} 8544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} 8545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} 8546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} 8547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} 8548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} 8549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} 8550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} 8551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} 8552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} 8553 8554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} 8555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} 8556 8557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} 8558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} 8559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} 8560}% end of \utfeightchardefs 8561 8562 8563% US-ASCII character definitions. 8564\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 8565 \relax 8566} 8567 8568% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 8569% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 8570% document encoding. 8571% 8572\setnonasciicharscatcode \other 8573 8574 8575\message{formatting,} 8576 8577\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 8578 8579\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 8580\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 8581\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 8582 8583% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 8584\vbadness = 10000 8585 8586% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 8587\hbadness = 2000 8588 8589% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 8590\widowpenalty=10000 8591\clubpenalty=10000 8592 8593% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 8594% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 8595% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 8596% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 8597% 8598\def\setemergencystretch{% 8599 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 8600 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 8601 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 8602 \else 8603 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 8604 \fi 8605} 8606 8607% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 8608% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 8609% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 8610% 8611% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 8612% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 8613% 8614\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 8615 \voffset = #3\relax 8616 \topskip = #6\relax 8617 \splittopskip = \topskip 8618 % 8619 \vsize = #1\relax 8620 \advance\vsize by \topskip 8621 \outervsize = \vsize 8622 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 8623 \pageheight = \vsize 8624 % 8625 \hsize = #2\relax 8626 \outerhsize = \hsize 8627 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 8628 \pagewidth = \hsize 8629 % 8630 \normaloffset = #4\relax 8631 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 8632 % 8633 \ifpdf 8634 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 8635 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 8636 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 8637 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 8638 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 8639 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 8640 \fi 8641 % 8642 \setleading{\textleading} 8643 % 8644 \parindent = \defaultparindent 8645 \setemergencystretch 8646} 8647 8648% @letterpaper (the default). 8649\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8650 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8651 \textleading = 13.2pt 8652 % 8653 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 8654 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 8655 {\voffset}{.25in}% 8656 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 8657 {11in}{8.5in}% 8658}} 8659 8660% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 8661\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 8662 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 8663 \textleading = 12pt 8664 % 8665 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 8666 {-.2in}{0in}% 8667 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 8668 {9.25in}{7in}% 8669 % 8670 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 8671 \tolerance = 700 8672 \hfuzz = 1pt 8673 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8674 \defbodyindent = .5cm 8675}} 8676 8677% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 8678% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 8679\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 8680 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 8681 \textleading = 12pt 8682 % 8683 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 8684 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 8685 {0pt}{14pt}% 8686 {9in}{6in}% 8687 % 8688 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 8689 \tolerance = 700 8690 \hfuzz = 1pt 8691 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8692 \defbodyindent = .4cm 8693}} 8694 8695% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 8696\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8697 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8698 \textleading = 13.2pt 8699 % 8700 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 8701 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 8702 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 8703 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 8704 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 8705 % your texinfo source file like this: 8706 % @tex 8707 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 8708 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 8709 % @end tex 8710 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 8711 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 8712 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 8713 {297mm}{210mm}% 8714 % 8715 \tolerance = 700 8716 \hfuzz = 1pt 8717 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8718 \defbodyindent = 5mm 8719}} 8720 8721% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 8722% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 8723% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 8724\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8725 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 8726 \textleading = 12.5pt 8727 % 8728 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 8729 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 8730 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 8731 {210mm}{148mm}% 8732 % 8733 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 8734 \tolerance = 800 8735 \hfuzz = 1.2pt 8736 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8737 \defbodyindent = 2mm 8738 \tableindent = 12mm 8739}} 8740 8741% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 8742\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 8743 \afourpaper 8744 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 8745 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 8746 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 8747 {297mm}{210mm}% 8748 % 8749 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 8750 \globaldefs = 0 8751}} 8752 8753% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 8754\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 8755 \afourpaper 8756 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 8757 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 8758 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 8759 {297mm}{210mm}% 8760 \globaldefs = 0 8761}} 8762 8763% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 8764% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 8765% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 8766% 8767\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 8768\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 8769 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 8770 \globaldefs = 1 8771 % 8772 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8773 \setleading{\textleading}% 8774 % 8775 \dimen0 = #1\relax 8776 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 8777 % 8778 \dimen2 = \hsize 8779 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 8780 % 8781 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 8782 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 8783 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 8784 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 8785}} 8786 8787% Set default to letter. 8788% 8789\letterpaper 8790 8791 8792\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 8793 8794% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 8795\catcode`\"=\other 8796\catcode`\~=\other 8797\catcode`\^=\other 8798\catcode`\_=\other 8799\catcode`\|=\other 8800\catcode`\<=\other 8801\catcode`\>=\other 8802\catcode`\+=\other 8803\catcode`\$=\other 8804\def\normaldoublequote{"} 8805\def\normaltilde{~} 8806\def\normalcaret{^} 8807\def\normalunderscore{_} 8808\def\normalverticalbar{|} 8809\def\normalless{<} 8810\def\normalgreater{>} 8811\def\normalplus{+} 8812\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 8813 8814% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 8815% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 8816% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 8817% 8818% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 8819% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 8820% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 8821% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 8822% 8823\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 8824 8825% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 8826% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 8827% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 8828% this is not a problem. 8829\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 8830 8831% Turn off all special characters except @ 8832% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). 8833% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 8834% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 8835 8836\catcode`\"=\active 8837\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 8838\let"=\activedoublequote 8839\catcode`\~=\active 8840\def~{{\tt\char126}} 8841\chardef\hat=`\^ 8842\catcode`\^=\active 8843\def^{{\tt \hat}} 8844 8845\catcode`\_=\active 8846\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 8847\let\realunder=_ 8848% Subroutine for the previous macro. 8849\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 8850 8851\catcode`\|=\active 8852\def|{{\tt\char124}} 8853\chardef \less=`\< 8854\catcode`\<=\active 8855\def<{{\tt \less}} 8856\chardef \gtr=`\> 8857\catcode`\>=\active 8858\def>{{\tt \gtr}} 8859\catcode`\+=\active 8860\def+{{\tt \char 43}} 8861\catcode`\$=\active 8862\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 8863 8864% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 8865% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 8866% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. 8867% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. 8868\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} 8869 8870% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 8871% parsing them. 8872\def\turnoffactive{% 8873 \normalturnoffactive 8874 \otherbackslash 8875} 8876 8877\catcode`\@=0 8878 8879% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 8880% as in \char`\\. 8881\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 8882\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 8883 8884% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 8885% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 8886{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 8887 8888% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 8889% in fixed width font. 8890\catcode`\\=\active 8891@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} 8892% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: 8893% @let \ = @normalbackslash 8894 8895% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 8896% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 8897% catcode other. 8898@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 8899@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 8900 8901% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 8902% the literal character `\'. 8903% 8904@def@normalturnoffactive{% 8905 @let\=@normalbackslash 8906 @let"=@normaldoublequote 8907 @let~=@normaltilde 8908 @let^=@normalcaret 8909 @let_=@normalunderscore 8910 @let|=@normalverticalbar 8911 @let<=@normalless 8912 @let>=@normalgreater 8913 @let+=@normalplus 8914 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 8915 @unsepspaces 8916} 8917 8918% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. 8919% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. 8920@otherifyactive 8921 8922% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 8923% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 8924% a backslash. 8925% 8926@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} 8927@global@let\ = @eatinput 8928 8929% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then 8930% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix 8931% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. 8932% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 8933% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 8934% 8935@gdef@fixbackslash{% 8936 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi 8937 @catcode`+=@active 8938 @catcode`@_=@active 8939} 8940 8941% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 8942@escapechar = `@@ 8943 8944% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 8945@catcode`@& = @other 8946@catcode`@# = @other 8947@catcode`@% = @other 8948 8949 8950@c Local variables: 8951@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 8952@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" 8953@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 8954@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 8955@c time-stamp-end: "}" 8956@c End: 8957 8958@c vim:sw=2: 8959 8960@ignore 8961 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 8962@end ignore 8963